JP6794719B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine having a gaming area in which a gaming ball flows down.

As a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered a ball entry section provided in the game area, and if the winning result is obtained in the lottery, it is advantageous for the player. A configuration that shifts to a special gaming state is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-074175

Here, there is still room for improvement from the viewpoint of increasing the attention to the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of satisfactorily increasing the degree of attention to the game.

The present invention
Operation means operated by the player and
A launching means for firing a game ball toward a game area with a firing intensity according to the operation mode of the operating means, and a firing means.
A first ball entry section and a second ball entry section in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
The first lottery means for performing the first lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the first ball entry section, and
Based on the fact that the first lottery is performed by the first lottery means, an effect for the first notification is performed by a predetermined notification means, and then the result of the first lottery is notified after a predetermined notification period. 1 Notification means and
A second lottery means for performing a second lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the second ball entry section, and
Based on the fact that the second lottery is performed by the second lottery means, an effect for the second notification is performed by a predetermined notification means, and then the result of the second lottery is notified after a predetermined notification period. 2 Notification means and
Based on the result of the first lottery being the granting result corresponding to the granting of the privilege, the first privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and
Based on the result of the second lottery being the granting result corresponding to the granting of the privilege, the second privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and
With
The first notification means can perform the production for the first notification while the production for the second notification is being performed by the second notification means.
The second notification means has a configuration capable of performing the production for the second notification while the production for the first notification is being performed by the first notification means.
The first ball entry section and the second ball entry section so that the game ball launched into the game area with a predetermined firing intensity can reach both the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section. The ball entry part is arranged,
A first state that limits the progress of the second lottery and allows the progress of the first lottery, and a second state that limits the progress of the first lottery and allows the progress of the second lottery are set. with a game setting means for performing,
The first ball entry section and the second entry section are arranged so that the game ball that has entered the first entry section can enter the second entry section. ..

It is possible to satisfactorily increase the degree of attention to the game.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main structure of a pachinko machine by disassembling. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board. (A) is a schematic view of the right first operating port in the closed state, and (b) is a schematic view of the right first operating port in the open state. (A), (b) is a schematic diagram for explaining the display content on the display screen of the symbol display device. (A) is a schematic view of a first variable winning device in a closed state, and (b) is a schematic view of a first variable winning device in an open state. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view seen from the side surface side of the second variable winning device, and (b) is a vertical cross-sectional view seen from the back side of the second variable winning device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the contents of various counters used for a winning / failing lottery. (A)-(d) It is explanatory drawing of the winning / failing table. It is explanatory drawing of (a), (b) distribution table. It is explanatory drawing of (a)-(d) variation display time table. It is explanatory drawing of (a)-(d) variation display time table. It is explanatory drawing of (a)-(d) variation display time table. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st game time control process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the 1st variation display time. It is a flowchart which shows the forced termination process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd game time control process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the 2nd variation start. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the 2nd variation display time. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode. It is explanatory drawing of the outline of (a), (b) game. It is explanatory drawing of (a), (b) payout base. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the forced termination process. It is a flowchart which shows the termination process of the opening / closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the game time control process. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board in 3rd Embodiment. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing of the right / wrong table. It is explanatory drawing of (a), (b) distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the 2nd variation start. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a variable end. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a variation display time. It is explanatory drawing of (a)-(d) variation display time table. It is explanatory drawing of (a)-(d) variation display time table. (A), (b) It is a timing chart for explaining the state of the hold number and the progress of the game round. It is a timing chart for explaining the number of holdings and the progress of the game. It is a timing chart for explaining how the game progresses. It is explanatory drawing of the outline of a game. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process for a working opening in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing corresponding to the upper limit winning command by an effect control device. It is explanatory drawing of the effect corresponding to (a) to (g). It is a flowchart which shows the holding image change process by the effect control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing about (a), (b) change of the holding image. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline of the game state (a)-(d). (A) It is a figure which shows the outline of the operating opening in the modification of the 5th Embodiment, and is the explanatory view for explaining the outline of (b)-(d) the gaming state. (A) It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board in 6th Embodiment, and (b) is the enlarged view of the operating opening. It is a timing chart for explaining the winning timing. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing of the right / wrong table. It is explanatory drawing of (a), (b) distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display time table change processing by a main control unit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline of the game state (a)-(d). It is explanatory drawing of the outline of a game. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline of the game state in the modification of the 6th Embodiment (a)-(h).

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded manner. Note that in FIG. 2, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the game area is omitted for convenience.

The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. The outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration for the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided on the island equipment of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The game machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip portion thereof, and has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so as not to be openable. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 13. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the game machine main body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PE formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PE, and the guiding means is provided by the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26. The guide rail is configured as. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PE by the guide rail.

Incidentally, the game ball launch mechanism 27 has a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying the game ball stored in the upper plate 66a described later onto the launch rail 27a, and the launch rail 27a. It is provided with a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. The solenoid 27c is driven and controlled by the rotation operation of the launch operation device (or launch handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, and the game ball is launched.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening has a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, a first operating port (or a first starting ball entry section) 33, a second operating opening (or a second starting ball entry section) 34, a through gate 35, and a variable. A display unit 36, a special figure display unit 37 as a main display unit, a general figure display unit 38 as an accessory display unit, and the like are provided, respectively. A plurality of general winning openings 31, a variable winning device 32, and a first operating opening 33 are provided.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, when the number of prize balls is entered into the first operating port 33, three prize balls are paid out, and when the balls are entered into the second operating port 34. Is executed when one prize ball is paid out, 10 prize balls are paid out when a ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, and when a ball is entered into the variable winning device 32. Is paid out 10 prize balls.

However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls related to the first operating port 33 and the number of prize balls related to the second operating port 34 may be the same, or the number of prize balls related to the first operating port 33 may be the same. The number of prize balls according to the above may be smaller than the number of prize balls related to the second operating port 34. Further, the number of prize balls of each of the plurality of first operating ports 33 may be different. Further, the number of prize balls related to at least one variable winning device 32 may be the same as or smaller than the number of prize balls related to other operating ports or the like. The number of prize balls in each of the plurality of variable winning devices 32 may be different.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and a game ball that does not enter various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area PE through the out port 24a. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 24b are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only is the ball discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PE after passing through the opening. The mode in which it is not discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the ball from entering the game ball into the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball into a ball is also referred to as a prize.

The variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PE. Due to the peripheral portion (center frame 36a) of the variable display unit 36 protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, there is an area where the game ball launched into the game area PE can flow down. It is partitioned. Specifically, in the game area PE, the upper region PE1 which is a region above the predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36 and the upper region PE1 which is continuously below the variable display unit 36 and the variable display unit 36. The left region PE2, which is the left region, the right region PE3, which is a region to the right of the variable display unit 36 and is continuous below the upper region PE1, and the left region PE2 and the right region PE3, respectively. On the other hand, it is continuously divided into a lower region PE4 which is a region below the variable display unit 36.

When the player operates the launch operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the first range that is less than the reference rotation amount as the first launch operation, the game ball is moved to the left of the center position in the lateral direction in the upper region PE1. Start to flow down. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PE1 → the left region PE2 → the lower region PE4. On the other hand, as the second launch operation, the player operates the launch operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or greater than the reference rotation amount, so that the upper region PE1 is on the right side of the center position in the lateral direction. The game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PE1 → the right region PE3 → the lower region PE4. That is, by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the launch operation device 28, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left side region PE2 of the left side region PE2 and the right side region PE3, and the right side region PE2. The game can be performed so that the game ball flows down the PE3.

Of the plurality of first actuating ports 33, the lower first actuating port 33A is installed in the lower region PE4. The lower first operating port 33A is opened upward, and no member for opening and closing is provided. Then, in the situation where the game ball is launched in the same mode, the winning probability to the lower first operating port 33A is constant regardless of the game state. Further, the lower first operating port 33A is arranged directly below the stage formed in the variable display unit 36, and is a game ball that has flowed into the stage through the guidance passage formed in the variable display unit 36 and is a stage. The game ball discharged from the center of the variable display unit 36 to the outside of the variable display unit 36 can easily win a prize in the lower first operating port 33A. A detection sensor 330 is provided in the lower first operating port 33A, and the detection sensor 330 detects a game ball that has won a prize in the lower first operating port 33A.

Here, when the lower first operating port 33A is provided in the lower region PE4 as described above, the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left region PE2, and the right region. In any case where the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the PE3, it is possible to win a prize in the lower first operating port 33A. However, since the entrance of the guide passage to the stage is provided for the left region PE2 and not for the right region PE3, the person who flows down the left region PE2 flows down the right region PE3. In comparison, a prize is likely to occur in the lower first operating port 33A. Further, regarding the arrangement of the game parts and the nails 24b in the left side region PE2 and the right side region PE3, the lower first operating port 33A is more likely to win a prize when the left side region PE2 is flowed down than when the right side region PE3 is flowed down. Is set to. Then, the game ball that has flowed down the right region PE3 is designed so that a prize is hardly generated in the lower first operating port 33A. That is, the lower first operating port 33A is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter the ball when the launch operation device 28 is operated by the first launch operation than when it is performed by the second launch operation.

Of the plurality of first operating ports 33, the right first operating port 33B is installed in the right region PE3. The right first operating port 33B cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PE2, and the launch operation device so that the game ball flows down the right area PE3. If 28 is operated, a prize can be won. That is, the right first operating port 33B is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter the ball when the launch operation device 28 is operated by the second launch operation than by the first launch operation.

The configuration of the right first operating port 33B will be described with reference to FIG. 4 (a) and 4 (b) are schematic views showing a vertical cross section of the right first operating port 33B.

The right first operating port 33B is an opening having a size that allows a game ball opened in the front-rear direction to pass through. The right first operating port 33B is provided with an electric accessory 331 that can be switched between an open state in which the ball can easily enter the right first operating port 33B and a closed state in which the ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter. More specifically about the electric accessory 331, the electric accessory 331 flows down from above the opening / closing accessory 332 that defines the movement of the game ball in the front-rear direction at the right first operating port 33B and the right first operating port 33B. It is composed of a receiver 333 that receives the game ball from below and guides it to the right first operating port 33B (rear of the game machine). The opening / closing accessory 332 has an opening / closing member 334 that can switch between a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass through the right first operating port 33B and an open state in which the game ball can pass, and the opening / closing accessory 332 is driven. The unit 335 switches between an open state and a closed state by being driven through a link mechanism (not shown). When the opening / closing member 334 is in the open state, the opening / closing member 334 is arranged behind the right first operating port 33B (front surface of the game board 24), and more specifically, in the ball discharge passage leading from the right first operating port 33B. Placed at the top. When the opening / closing member 334 is closed, the opening / closing member 334 closes the right first operating port 33B and is flush with the front surface of the game board 24. That is, the opening / closing member 334 does not protrude forward from the front surface of the game board 24 regardless of whether it is arranged in the open state or the closed state.

The receiving object 333 receives only one game ball flowing down from above the right first operating port 33B from below, and guides the received game ball to the right first operating port 33B, and above. It is provided with a receiving member 336 that can be switched between a non-receiving state in which the game ball flowing down from the ball cannot be received from below. The receiving member 336 is switched between a receiving state and a non-receiving state by being driven by a driving unit 337 through a link mechanism (not shown). When the receiving member 336 is in the receiving state, the receiving member 336 can receive only one game ball that protrudes forward from the right first operating port 33B (front surface of the game board 24) and flows down from above. On the other hand, when the receiving member 336 is in the non-receiving state, the receiving member 336 is arranged behind the right first operating port 33B (front surface of the game board 24), and more specifically, the ball is discharged from the right first operating port 33B. Located at the bottom of the aisle. That is, the receiving member 336 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 24 in the receiving state, and is arranged behind the front surface of the game board 24 in the non-receiving state.

In the following description, the state in which the opening / closing accessory 332 is in the open state and the receiving accessory 333 is in the receiving state is also referred to as the support state of the electric accessory 331, and the opening / closing accessory 332 is in the closed state and is in the receiving state. The state in which the object 333 is in the non-received state is also referred to as the non-supported state of the electric accessory 331. Then, when the electric accessory 331 is in the supported state, the ball is allowed to enter the right first operating port 33B, and when the electric accessory 331 is not supported, the ball is restricted from entering the right first operating port 33B. In other words, when the electric accessory 331 is in the supported state, the ball entry rate to the right first operating port 33B is improved, and when the electric accessory 331 is not supported, the ball enters the right first operating port 33B. The ball rate decreases.

Here, when the electric accessory 331 is in the support state, the receiving member 336 can receive only one game ball flowing down from above, and the game ball is guided to the rear of the game board 24. That is, when the electric accessory 331 is in the support state, one game ball is allowed to enter the right first operating port 33B, and no more balls are allowed to enter. By doing so, it is possible not to increase the ball entry rate into the right first operating port 33B too much due to the electric accessory 331 being in the support state. In addition, by limiting the number of balls entered in the supported state to one, the event of entering multiple balls at once can be avoided, the ball entry rate can be set as designed, and the supported state and the unsupported state can be obtained. It is also possible to reduce the difference in the ball entry rate.

Further, since the opening / closing accessory 332 and the receiving accessory 333 in the right first operating port 33B and the electric accessory 331 are configured as described above, the right first operating is in a situation where the electric accessory 331 is not supported. In front of the mouth 33B, the flow of the game ball is not hindered by the right first operating port 33B or the electric accessory 331. That is, the game ball flowing down in front of the right first operating port 33B is guided to the right first operating port 33B by the electric accessory 331 when the electric accessory 331 is in the supported state, but is not supported. If this is the case, the product flows down to the downstream side of the right first operating port 33B as it is without being interfered with by the electric accessory 331. Therefore, in a situation where the electric accessory 331 is not supported, the ball entry rate at the ball entry portion on the downstream side thereof can be expected to be as designed without being interfered with by the electric accessory 331. Become.

From the viewpoint of causing a change in the ball entry rate to the right first operating port 33B, the configuration is not limited to the above-mentioned electric accessory 331, and other configurations may be used, for example, an existing electric tulip. It may be configured. Further, the state in which ball entry is likely to occur and the state in which ball entry is less likely to occur may be switched by the change of the right first operating port 33B itself. Further, the right first operating port 33B is opened in the front-rear direction, and the opening and closing of the opening / closing member allows / restricts the front-back movement of the game ball, so that the ball can enter the right first operating port 33B. / It may be a restricted configuration.

In the ball discharge passage leading from the right first operating port 33B, a detection sensor 338 is provided at a position where the game ball always passes, and the detection sensor 338 detects the winning game ball in the right first operating port 33B. ..

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the right first operating port 33B in the right region PE3. That is, the through gate 35 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left region PE2 (when the first launch operation is performed), and the right region PE3 When the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down (when the second launch operation is performed), a prize can be won. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball winning the through gate 35 flows down the game area PE after winning the prize. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the prize in the ball entry portion (for example, the right first operating port 33B) on the downstream side thereof. The through gate 35 is provided with a detection sensor 35a, and the detection sensor 35a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the through gate 35.

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the electric accessory 331 of the right first operating port 33B is switched from the non-supported state to the supported state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 35, and a general drawing display provided in the lower right corner of the game board 24, which is an area where a game ball outside the game area PE does not pass. The variable display of the pattern is performed in the part 38. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the support winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display is completed, the mode shifts to the support execution mode. In the support execution mode, the electric accessory 331 is in the support state in a predetermined mode.

The cathode ray display unit 38 is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , CRT or other types of display devices such as dot matrix display devices. In addition, as the pattern that is variablely displayed on the general map display unit 38, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, or A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

Further, a normal map holding display unit 41 is provided at a position adjacent to the normal map display unit 38. The number of game balls that have won the through gate 35 is held up to a maximum of four, and the number of holdings is displayed by lighting the general drawing hold display unit 41.

In the right region PE3, a second operating port 34 is provided on the downstream side of the right first operating port 33B. The second actuating port 34 is open upward and is not provided with a member that opens and closes. Then, in the situation where the game ball is launched in the same mode, the winning probability to the second operating port 34 is constant regardless of the game state. However, since the right first operating port 33B is arranged on the upstream side of the second operating port 34 as described above, in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the right first operating port 33B (the electric accessory 331 is in the supported state). The probability of winning the second operating port 34 is lower than that in the state where it is difficult to win the right first operating port 33B (the electric accessory 331 is not supported). A detection sensor 340 is provided in the second operating port 34, and the detection sensor 340 detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second operating port 34.

A big hit lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the first operating port 33 (lower first operating port 33A, right first operating port 33B) or the second operating port 34. Then, the lottery result is clearly shown through the display effect on the symbol display device 42 of the special figure display unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

Regarding the special figure display unit 37 In detail, the special figure display unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display unit 37a and a second special figure display unit 37b. In the first special figure display unit 37a, a big hit lottery is performed by triggering a prize in the first operating port 33 (winning in the lower first operating port 33A or the right first operating port 33B), so that the pattern can be displayed in a variable manner or. A predetermined display is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, the second special figure display unit 37b performs a variable display or a predetermined display of the pattern by performing a big hit lottery triggered by winning a prize in the second operating port 34. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed.

The first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b are composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, it may be composed of other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. Further, as the pattern displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, and a plurality of types of characters Can be considered, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are displayed can be considered.

About the symbol display device 42 In detail, the symbol display device 42 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 42 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. You may.

In the symbol display device 42, based on a prize in any of the first actuating ports 33 (lower first actuating port 33A or right first actuating port 33B), the first special symbol display unit 37a displays a variable pattern of the symbol or a predetermined value. When the display is performed, the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol is performed accordingly, and the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display unit 37b based on the winning of the second operating port 34. When it is performed, a variable display of a symbol or a predetermined display is performed accordingly. In the symbol display device 42, not only a display effect triggered by winning a prize in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, but also a display effect in the opening / closing execution mode when a big hit is won is performed. ..

The display contents when the symbol display device 42 performs variable display of the symbol will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a display screen 42a of the symbol display device 42.

The design, which is a kind of design, is composed of nine types of main designs with numbers "1" to "9", and sub-designs consisting of shell-shaped patterns. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display screen 42a of the symbol display device 42, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols.

As shown in FIG. 5 (b), on the display screen 42a, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has become like. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set on the display screen 42a. ..

When a variable display of symbols is performed on the display screen 42a based on winning a prize in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, the symbols in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. The variable display is started as shown. Then, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are statically displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. In addition, when the variable display of the symbol ends, it corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode described later, and when it is set to the high frequency support mode described later after the open / close execution mode, it is on one of the effective lines. If the same odd-numbered symbol combination is formed in, and it corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode described later and is set to the low frequency support mode described later after the open / close execution mode, it is on one of the effective lines. The same combination of even-numbered symbols is formed in.

It should be noted that, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 33 and 34, the display is started on any of the special figure display units 37a and 37b and the symbol display device 42, and until the predetermined result is displayed and ended. Is equivalent to one game. Further, the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 42 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the symbol display device 42 is not limited to the above-mentioned symbol, and for example, only numbers may be variablely displayed as the symbol.

At the lower part of the display screen 42a, a special figure display area Ga for the first operating port 33 and a special figure display area Gb for the second operating port 34 are set. In the special figure display area Ga for the first operating port, the same number of unit holding display areas Ga1 to Ga4 as the maximum number of holdings when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. It is provided in this way. Specifically, when the game ball wins the first operating port 33, the maximum number of holdings is 4, and in correspondence with this, the special figure display area Ga includes the first unit holding display areas Ga1 and the second. The unit hold display area Ga2, the third unit hold display area Ga3, and the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 are set.

In the special figure display area Gb for the second operating port, the same number of unit holding display areas Gb1 to Gb4 as the maximum number of holdings when the game ball wins the second operating port 34 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. It is provided in this way. Specifically, when the game ball wins the second operating port 34, the maximum number of holdings is 4, and in correspondence with this, the special figure display area Gb includes the first unit holding display area Gb1 and the second. The unit hold display area Gb2, the third unit hold display area Gb3, and the fourth unit hold display area Gb4 are set.

Further, at the lower part of the display screen 42a, the execution display areas GA and GB are set in parallel with the special figure display areas Ga and Gb. In the execution display area GA for the first operating port, information corresponding to the pending information of the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a currently being executed is displayed. Further, in the execution display area GB for the second operating port, information corresponding to the pending information of the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b currently being executed is displayed.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the game times on the first special figure display unit 37a and the game times on the second special figure display unit 37b may be executed in parallel. Specifically, the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a based on the winning of the first operating port 33 and the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b based on the winning of the second operating port 34 are If they overlap, the game times of the special figure display units 37a and 37b in the special figure display unit 37 are executed in parallel. On the other hand, the game times by the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen 42a of the symbol display device 42 are executed so as to correspond to the game times of one of the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. To. That is, although the game times in the special figure display units 37a and 37b are executed in duplicate, the game times in the symbol display device 42 are among the game times in which the special figure display units 37a and 37b are executed in duplicate. It is executed so as to correspond to only one of them.

The execution display areas GA and GB each have a plurality of small display units, and variable display is possible by blinking each of these display units. In addition, it is possible to notify the game result of the corresponding hold information by the combination of display colors when the blinking of each display unit is stopped. That is, the execution display areas GA and GB have an auxiliary role of variable display of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 on the display screen 42a, and when each game time overlaps, each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 This is to notify the result of the game times on the side where the fluctuation display of is not performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a special figure reservation display unit 43 is provided below the symbol display device 42 on the front side of the variable display unit 36. The special figure hold display unit 43 includes a first special figure hold display unit 43a and a second special figure hold display unit 43b, the first special figure hold display unit 43a corresponds to the first operating port 33, and the second special figure hold display unit 43. Figure Hold display unit 43b corresponds to the second operating port 34. The maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the first operating port 33 (lower first operating port 33A or right first operating port 33B) is reserved, and the reserved number is increased by lighting the first special figure reservation display unit 43a. It is supposed to be displayed. In addition, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the second operating port 34 is held up to a maximum of four, and the number of held balls is displayed by lighting the second special figure hold display unit 43b.

The maximum number of holdings of the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is not limited to the above four, and may be larger or smaller than the above four. Further, it is not essential that the maximum number of holdings of the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is the same, and the maximum number of holdings may be different. Further, the number of winning prizes may not be reserved for at least one of the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. In these cases, the special figure hold display unit 43 may be provided correspondingly depending on the number of holds (presence or absence).

When a big hit lottery based on a prize in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is won, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode in which the variable winning device 32 can be won. The variable winning device 32 is arranged on the downstream side of the through gate 35 and on the upstream side of the right first operating port 33B in the right region PE3. That is, when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the variable winning device 32 flows down the left region PE2 (when the first launch operation is performed), the variable winning device 32 cannot win a prize, and the right region PE3 is played. When the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the ball flows down (when the second launch operation is performed), a prize can be won. The variable winning device 32 is provided with a first variable winning device 32A and a second variable winning device 32B, and the variable winning devices 32A and 32B that are opened at a predetermined timing in the open / close execution mode are switched. The first variable winning device 32A and the second variable winning device 32B are arranged so that the first variable winning device 32A is on the upstream side of the second variable winning device 32B.

First, the first variable winning device 32A will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (a) and 6 (b) are vertical cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 32A.

The first variable winning device 32A has a large winning opening (or special winning opening) 321 that is open in the front-rear direction and has a size that allows the game ball to pass through, and the game ball cannot pass through the large winning opening 321. It is provided with an opening / closing member 322 that switches between a closed state and an open state through which a game ball can pass. The opening / closing member 322 is opened by being driven by the drive unit 323 through a link mechanism (not shown). Further, in the first variable winning device 32A, a winning passing portion 324 is formed at a position where a game ball that has entered the first variable winning device 32A through the large winning opening 321 always passes. The detection sensor 325 for the large winning opening is provided so that the detection region exists at the position of the winning passing portion 324. The detection sensor 325 for the large winning opening individually detects the game balls that have won the first variable winning device 32A.

Next, the second variable winning device 32B will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7A is a vertical cross-sectional view of the second variable winning device 32B as viewed from the side, and FIG. 7B is a vertical cross-sectional view of the second variable winning device 32B as viewed from the rear side. is there.

As shown in FIG. 7A, in the second variable winning device 32B, a distribution inlet 351 having a size that is open in the front-rear direction and allows a game ball to pass through is formed, and the distribution entrance 351 is used for gaming. It is provided with a distribution member 352 that switches between a closed state in which the ball cannot pass and an open state in which the game ball can pass. The distribution member 352 is opened by being driven by a drive unit 353 for distribution inlet through a link mechanism (not shown). The distribution entrance 351 constitutes the entrance of the guide passage 354, and the game ball flowing in from the distribution entrance 351 flows down the guide passage 354 to the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 7B, the guide passage 354 is bifurcated from the intermediate position, and constitutes an upstream region 355 constituting the upstream side of the branch position and one of the downstream sides of the branch position. The V winning area (or used area) 356 and the discharging area (or unused area) 357 constituting the other downstream side of the branch position are provided. Further, at the branch position, a shutter 358 is provided as a distribution means for distributing the game ball that has reached the branch position from the upstream area 355 to either the V winning area 356 or the discharge area 357. When the shutter 358 is not driven by the shutter drive unit 359, the game ball that has reached the branch position flows into the discharge area 357, and when the shutter 358 is driven by the shutter drive unit 359. The game ball that has reached the branch position will flow into the V winning area 356.

The detection sensor 361 for counting is provided so that the detection region exists at a position where the game ball flowing into the upstream region 355 always passes. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the counting detection sensor 361, the prize ball corresponding to the winning of the second variable winning device 32B is paid out. Further, the detection sensor 362 for V prize is provided so that the detection region exists at a position where the game ball flowing into the V prize region 356 always passes. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the detection sensor 362 for V winning, the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is set to the predetermined lottery mode. More specifically, in the open / close execution mode, the round game by the first variable winning device 32A is switched to the round game by the second variable winning device 32B at a predetermined timing (fifth round). Then, after the game is switched to the round game by the second variable winning device 32B, when the game ball is detected by the detection sensor 362 for V winning, the winning / failing lottery mode has a higher winning probability than usual after the opening / closing execution mode. Set to high probability mode.

Further, the discharge detection sensor 363 is provided so that the detection area exists at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the discharge area 357 always passes. Based on the detection results from the ejection detection sensor 363 and the V winning detection sensor 362, it is determined whether or not the game ball remains in the second variable winning device 32B.

By the way, in this pachinko machine 10, the drive timing of the shutter drive unit 359 is set so that the game ball that has won the second variable winning device 32B is guided to the V winning area 356 with a 100% probability. However, the specific probability of being induced is arbitrary and may be lower than 100%. Then, by making the probability of being guided to the V winning area 356 different, the probability of being set to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode may be different. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the type of the opening / closing execution mode (the type of the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing) is switched to a mode in which the second variable winning device 32B is won at a predetermined timing in the opening / closing execution mode. An open / close execution mode that does not cause the same switching as the open / close execution mode is set. Then, when the switching occurs, the game ball that has won the second variable winning device 32B is guided to the V winning area 356 with a probability of almost 100% (about entering if aimed). This is guided to the V winning area 356 side depending on the type of opening / closing execution mode, for example, when switching occurs regardless of the type of opening / closing execution mode and the switching occurs and the second variable winning device 32B is aimed at. It is assumed that the probability of being executed is different. Even in this way, it is possible to make the probability of being set to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode different depending on the type of the opening / closing execution mode (the type of the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing). For example, although round switching by the second variable winning device 32B may occur in the opening / closing execution mode, if the probability of being guided to the V winning area 356 side is 0%, the probability is substantially high after the opening / closing execution mode. It can be a game result that is not set to the mode. Further, if the probability of being guided to the V winning area 356 side is 50%, there is a chance that the high probability mode will be established after that regardless of the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. It is possible to pay much attention to the mode (especially during the round by the second variable winning device 32B).

Further, the second variable winning device 32B is preferably formed so that it can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 whether the winning game ball is distributed to the V winning area 356 or the discharging area 357. Specifically, it is preferable that the front surface side of the second variable winning device 32B is formed to be colored transparent or colorless transparent.

The gauge configuration in the right region PE3 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 3 again. In the right region PE3, the ball entry portions 35, 35A, 35B, 32B, 34 are the through gate 35, the first variable winning device 32A, the second variable winning device 32B, the right first operating port 33B, the second from the upstream. The operating ports 34 are arranged in this order. Of these, the through gate 35, the first variable winning device 32A, the second variable winning device 32B, and the right first operating port 33B are arranged at positions where the game ball launched toward the right region PE3 always passes. .. Specifically, in the right region PE3, nails 24b are arranged so as to surround the through gate 35, the first variable winning device 32A, the second variable winning device 32B, and the right first operating port 33B from the left-right direction. The guide passage W1 is formed so that the nail 24b regulates the game ball from bypassing the through gate 35 and the like. In addition to / instead of the nail 24b, the guide passage W1 may be formed of resin or the like. Further, the guidance passage W1 may have a function of guiding the game ball to each of the entry portions 35, 35A, 35B, 32B, 34, and may have a configuration in which a spilled ball may occur.

As described above, the through gate 35 is a passing type entry portion that is discharged to the game area PE after winning, and the game ball launched toward the right area PE3 passes through (winning) the through gate 35 and then passes (wins). It is led out to the first variable winning device 32A side. The first variable winning device 32A, the second variable winning device 32B, and the right first operating port 33B are all configured to be displaceable into an open state (supported state) and a closed state (non-supported state), and these are open. If it is in a state, it enters the ball, and if it is closed, it passes through. That is, in a situation where the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 reaches the first variable winning device 32A, if the first variable winning device 32A is in the open state, the first variable winning device 32A is won and the game ball is won. Does not reach the second variable winning device 32B or the right first operating port 33B on the downstream side thereof. On the other hand, in the situation where the game ball reaches the first variable winning device 32A, if the first variable winning device 32A is in the closed state, the reached game ball passes through the first variable winning device 32A and is second variable. It is led out to the winning device 32B side. Then, in the situation where the game ball reaches the second variable winning device 32B, if the second variable winning device 32B is in the open state, the game ball wins the second variable winning device 32B, and if it is in the closed state, the right It is led out to the first operating port 33B side.

On the downstream side of the right first operating port 33B, a nail 24b is arranged so as to guide the game ball toward the second operating port 34 and the out port 24a, respectively, and the branch passage W2 is formed by the nail 24b. Has been done. In the branch passage W2, the passage leading to the second operating port 34 side is referred to as a right branch passage W3, and the passage guiding to the out port side is referred to as a left branch passage W4. These branch passages W3 and W4 may be formed of resin or the like. In the right branch passage W3, nails 24b are arranged so that all the flowing game balls are guided toward the second operating port 34. As described above, the second operating port 34 is not provided with a switching member for switching whether or not the game ball can be entered. Therefore, when the game balls that have passed through the right first operating port 33B are distributed to the right branch passage W3 side, all the game balls enter the second operating port 34 regardless of the gaming state. In addition, a spilled ball may be generated in the right branch passage W3.

In the left branch passage W4, nails 24b are arranged so that the flowing game ball is guided mainly toward the out port 24a. Therefore, when the game ball that has passed through the right first operating port 33B is distributed to the left branch passage W4 side, the game ball is mainly discharged through the out port 24a. Further, a part of the game balls distributed to the left branch passage W4 side is guided to the lower first operating port 33A. It should be noted that the left branch passage W4 may be configured to allow the ball to enter another entry portion (for example, the general winning opening 31). Further, all the game balls distributed to the left branch passage W4 may be guided to the out port 24a.

In the branch passage W2, the distribution rate between the right branch passage W3 and the left branch passage W4 is 50%, respectively. That is, half of the game balls that have passed through the right first operating port 33B enter the second operating port 34, and the other half are discharged through the out port 24a.

In the branch passage W2, a distribution member may be provided to sort which of the right branch passage W3 and the left branch passage W4 is guided. In this case, it is preferable that the distribution member is periodically operated so that the distribution ratios of the branch passages W3 and W4 are the same as described above.

Further, the distribution rate in the branch passage W2 is not limited to the above. For example, the rate of distribution to the right branch passage W3 may be more or less than 50%, or 100% may be distributed to the right branch passage W3. Further, not all the game balls distributed to the right branch passage W3 enter the second operating port 34, but a spilled ball is generated in the middle, and the spill rate is taken into consideration in the right first operating port 33B. A predetermined ratio (for example, 70%) of the game balls that have passed through the above may be distributed to the right branch passage W3 (the ball entering the second operating port 34 in consideration of the spilled ball is the first right operation). 50% of the game balls that have passed through the mouth 33B).

The front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 formed by attaching the game board 24 having the above configuration to the resin base 21. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire area of the game area PE can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin, and the game area PE is formed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62. It may be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window 61. A display light emitting unit 63 is provided on the right side of the window unit 61 as a part of various lamp units. Further, an error light emitting unit 64 is provided above the window unit 61. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 65 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided.

Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 66 and a lower bulging portion 67 bulging toward the front side are arranged vertically. An upper plate 66a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 66, and a lower plate 67a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 67. The upper plate 66a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 67a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 66a.

Next, the configuration on the back side of the game machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 81 that controls the main control of the game is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 81 has a main control board housed in a board box.

The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 81. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism unit 73 and a control device collecting unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

The payout mechanism unit 73 includes a tank 75 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game ball paid out from the payout device 76 is discharged to the upper plate 66a or the lower plate 67a through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with, for example, a back pack board having a power switch for turning on and off the power supply while supplying a main power supply of 24 volts AC.

The control device collective unit 74 generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by the payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76 and various control devices, and is accompanied by the operation of the launch operation device 28 by the player. It includes a power supply and a launch control device 78 for controlling the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply and launch control device 78 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

The back pack 72 is provided with an external terminal plate 79 in addition to the payout mechanism unit 73 and the control device collecting unit 74. The external terminal plate 79 is installed on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 at the upper corner portion on the rotation base end side of the back pack unit 15. The external terminal board 79 is a board for outputting a predetermined signal in order to make the management computer of the game hall recognize the state of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The main control device 81 includes a main control board 201 that controls the main control of the game, and a power supply monitoring board (power failure monitoring board) 205 that monitors the power supply. The MPU 202 is mounted on the main control board 201. ROM 203 and RAM 204 are built in the MPU 202.

The ROM 203 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require an external power supply for storage retention, such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory, as read-only. The ROM 203 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 202.

The RAM 204 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access and is the same. The time required for reading is faster than that of ROM 203 when compared with the data capacity of. The RAM 204 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 203 is executed.

In addition to the above elements, the MPU 202 or the main control board 201 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. It is not essential that the ROM 203 and the RAM 204 are integrated into a single chip with respect to the MPU 202, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power supply monitoring board 205, a payout control device 77, various prize detection sensors 35a, 325, 330, 338, 340, 361, 362, 363 and the like are connected to the input side of the MPU 202. A power supply and a launch control device 78 are connected to the power supply monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power supply monitoring board 205. Further, based on the detection results of various prize detection sensors 35a, 325, 330, 338, 340, 361, 362, and 363, the MPU 202 makes a prize determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry portion. Further, in the MPU 202, a big hit lottery is executed based on the winning of the first operating port 33 (lower first operating port 33A, right first operating port 33B) or the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 is won. Execute a support lottery based on.

A power supply monitoring board 205, a payout control device 77, and an effect control device 82 are connected to the output side of the MPU 202. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on the result of winning a prize determination to the ball entry unit. Various commands such as a change command, a type command, a final stop command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the effect control device 82. Details of these various commands will be described later.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 202, each drive unit 323, 353, 359 for the variable winning device 32 (first variable winning device 32A, second variable winning device 32B) and each drive unit 335 for the electric accessory 331 are provided. , 337, the first special figure display unit 37a, the second special figure display unit 37b, and the general drawing display unit 38 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 201, and the MPU 202 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Further, an external terminal plate 79 is connected to the output side of the MPU 202. The external terminal plate 79 is provided with a plurality of external terminals (output terminals). For example, eight external terminals are provided, and the types of information output externally to the management computer are different. To these plurality of external terminals, a terminal for externally outputting an open / close execution signal indicating that the open / close execution mode is in progress, and an external output of a high frequency signal indicating that the high frequency support mode is in progress. Includes terminals. The MPU 202 sets information according to the progress of the game in the external output buffer provided in the RAM 204. Then, according to the information set in the external output buffer, the external terminal board 79 is set for signal output, and the state of the pachinko machine 10 is recognized by the management computer of the game hall. Each external terminal is configured by using a photocoupler in order to prevent the reverse flow while enabling transmission of an electric signal from the main control device 81 to the management computer.

The power supply monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power supply and launch control device 78, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

The power supply and launch control device 78 are connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 201, the payout control device 77, and the like is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do. Further, the power supply and the launch control device 78 are responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and drive the game ball launch mechanism 27 based on specifying a predetermined launch operation for the launch operation device 28.

The effect control device 82 drives and controls the display light emitting unit 63, the error light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 81, and also drives and controls the display control device 212. Is to control. The display control device 212 executes the display control of the symbol display device 42 based on the command input from the effect control device 82.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery at MPU202>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery in the MPU 202 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 202 uses various counter information to perform a jackpot lottery, a support lottery for the electric accessory 331, display settings for the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, and setting for the symbol display of the symbol display device 42. , The display of the general map display unit 38 is set. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot occurrence lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 used for the jackpot result type lottery, and the reach used for the reach generation lottery when the symbol display device 42 is disengaged and fluctuates. A random number counter C3, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a variation type counter CS for determining the variation display time in each of the special figure display units 37a and 37b and the symbol display device 42, and an electric motor. It is decided to use the electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the support lottery for whether or not the accessory 331 is in the support state. The counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS are provided in various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals.

Each numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stores information on holding information for the jackpot lottery when a prize is won in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 provided as a means. The hold ball storage area 232 includes a first special figure hold area RA, a first hold number storage area NA, and a first execution area RAE as areas for storing hold information based on winning a prize in the first operation port 33. It includes a second special figure holding area RB, a second holding number storage area NB, and a second execution area RBE as areas for storing holding information based on winning a prize in the second operating port 34.

The first special figure reservation area RA includes a first area RA1, a second area RA2, a third area RA3, and a fourth area RA4, and a jackpot random number counter is provided according to the winning history of the first operating port 33. Numerical information of C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS are stored in any of the areas RA1 to RA4 as reserved information on the special figure side.

In this case, in the first area RA1 to the fourth area RA4, when the first operating port 33 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area RA1 → the second area RA2 → the third area RA3 → the third. Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of 4 areas RA4. By providing the four areas RA1 to RA4 in this way, up to four winning histories of the game ball to the first operating port 33 can be reserved and stored. Further, the number of reserved information stored in each of the areas RA1 to RA4 is stored as numerical information in the first reserved number storage area NA. Then, the numerical information of the first reserved number storage area NA is updated in accordance with the increase / decrease of the reserved information.

The number of items that can be stored in the hold area RA for the first special figure is not limited to four, and is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more. It may be singular.

The first execution area RAE is an area in which hold information for which a hit / fail determination, a distribution determination, or the like is to be performed is stored when the variable display is started on the first special figure display unit 37a. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special figure display unit 37a is started, the hold information stored in the first area RA1 of the first special figure hold area RA is moved to the first execution area RAE. To. Then, based on the hold information moved to the first execution area RAE, the winning / failing determination and the distribution determination of one game round are performed.

Each area RB, NB, RBE regarding the hold information based on the winning of the second operating port 34 has the same configuration as each area RA, NA, RAE regarding the holding information based on the winning of the first operating port 33. ..

That is, the second special drawing reservation area RB includes the first area RB1, the second area RB2, the third area RB3, and the fourth area RB4, and is a big hit according to the winning history to the second operating port 34. Each numerical information of the random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS is stored in any of the areas RB1 to RB4 as the reserved information on the special figure side.

In this case, in the first area RB1 to the fourth area RB4, when the winning of the second operating port 34 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area RB1 → the second area RB2 → the third area RB3 → the third. Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of 4 area RB4. By providing the four areas RB1 to RB4 in this way, up to four winning histories of the game ball to the second operating port 34 can be reserved and stored. Further, the number of reserved information stored in each area RB1 to RB4 is stored as numerical information in the second reserved number storage area NB. Then, the numerical information of the second reserved number storage area NB is updated in accordance with the increase / decrease of the reserved information.

The number of items that can be stored in the hold area RB for the second special drawing is not limited to four, and is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more. It may be singular.

The second execution area RBE is an area in which hold information for which a hit / fail determination, a distribution determination, or the like is to be performed is stored when the variation display is started on the second special figure display unit 37b. Specifically, when the variable display of the second special figure display unit 37b is started, the hold information stored in the first area RB1 of the second special figure hold area RB is moved to the second execution area RBE. To. Then, based on the hold information moved to the second execution area RBE, the winning / failing determination and the distribution determination of one game round are performed.

As described above, since the respective execution areas RAE and RBE are provided corresponding to the reserved areas RA and RB for each special figure, it is possible to determine whether or not the reserved information is correct or not based on the winning of the first operating port 33. And the determination of whether or not the reserved information is based on the winning of the second operating port 34 can be executed in parallel in the respective execution areas RAE and RBE.

More specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, reach the maximum value (that is, 599), and then return to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area RA for the first special drawing of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 33, and the second special drawing of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operating port 34. It is stored in the reserved area RB.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a hit / miss table (hit / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area 221 as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the pass / fail table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, as the hit / miss table, the hit / miss table for the first special figure (first hit / miss information group for low probability) in the low probability mode of FIG. 10 (a) and the high probability of FIG. 10 (b). The first hit / miss table for the first special figure in the mode (first hit / miss information group for high probability) and the second hit / miss table for the second special figure in the low probability mode in FIG. 10 (c) (second hit / miss information group for low probability). And the second special figure hit / miss table (second hit / miss information group for high probability) in the high probability mode of FIG. 10 (d) are set. That is, the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) set as the lottery mode in the winning / losing lottery means, and the first operation is performed for each mode. A pass / fail table for the first special figure regarding the hold information based on the winning of the mouth 33 and a win / fail table for the second special drawing of the hold information based on the winning of the second operating port 34 are provided.

Here, in the winning / failing table for any special figure, under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10C, a big hit The number of winning random numbers is two. Further, in any of the winning / failing tables for special figures, as shown in FIGS. 10B and 10D under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery. , The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is 20 in each case. If the winning probability of the high probability mode is higher than that of the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary. However, it is preferable that the winning probabilities in each special figure are the same in the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

Further, in each lottery mode, the lottery result is a result other than the value of the random number that wins the jackpot, but in this pachinko machine 10, two types of the result are set, a special loss result and a normal loss result. Has been done. These differences will be described later.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value (that is, 29), and then return to 0. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are: (1) the support mode in the electric accessory 331 of the right first operating port 33B after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (2) the opening / closing control of the variable winning devices 32A and 32B in the opening / closing execution mode. By providing a difference between the two conditions of mode, a plurality of jackpot results are set.

As a support mode in the electric accessory 331 of the right first operating port 33B, a situation in which the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area PE (the second firing operation so as to flow down the right area PE3). Low frequency support mode (low frequency support mode) so that the frequency with which the electric accessory 331 of the right first operating port 33B is opened per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where Frequent support state or low frequency guide state) and high frequency support mode (high frequency support state or high frequency guide state) are set.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery using the electric accessory release counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 1/2). However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 331 is opened when the electric accessory open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and one more opening. The time is set long. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric accessory open state is won and the electric accessory 331 is opened multiple times, it is closed from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The time is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory opening lottery to be held after one electric accessory opening lottery is set is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. Has been done.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the right first operating port 33B will be won is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability that the lower first operating port 33A and the second operating port 34 will be won is higher than that of the right first operating port 33B, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower number The probability that a prize will be given to the right first operating port 33B is higher than that of the first operating port 33A and the second operating port 34. Then, when a prize is won in the right first operating port 33B, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls held so much. It can be performed.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the electric service open state per unit time is not limited to the above, for example, the electric accessory open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric service open state in. Further, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode may be set by differentiating any one condition or an arbitrary combination of the number of times, the opening time, and the winning probability.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area RA for the first special drawing of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 33, and the second special drawing of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operating port 34. It is stored in the reserved area RB.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 222 as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, as the distribution table, the distribution table for the first special figure (first distribution information group) in FIG. 11 (a) and the second special figure in FIG. 11 (b) are used. A distribution table (second distribution information group) is set.

In the distribution table for the first special figure, as shown in FIG. 11 (a), the jackpot result without V (high probability non-transition result) and the jackpot result with 1V (first high) are distributed to the game results. Probability transition result) is set. In the distribution table for the second special figure, as shown in FIG. 11B, the distribution destinations of the game results are the 1V and jackpot result (first high probability transition result) and the second V and jackpot result (first). 2 High probability transition result) is set.

Here, an mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning devices 32A and 32B in the opening / closing execution mode of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

The opening / closing execution mode of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of a big hit includes a normal opening / closing execution mode in which only opening / closing control is performed by the first variable winning device 32A, opening / closing control by the first variable winning device 32A, and a second variable winning device 32B. An opening / closing execution mode for V probability change is set in which opening / closing control is performed by. In the normal opening / closing execution mode, the large winning opening 321 in the first variable winning device 32A is opened and closed five times, and one opening is until 30 sec (first period) elapses or the number of winnings in the large winning opening 321. Is continued until the number becomes 8 (first number). On the other hand, in the V probability variation opening / closing execution mode, the large winning opening 321 in the first variable winning device 32A is opened / closed four times, and then the distribution inlet 351 in the second variable winning device 32B is opened / closed once. Each open state continues until 30 seconds (first period) elapses or until the number of winnings to the open side of the large winning opening 321 and the distribution entrance 351 reaches 8 (first number). Will be done.

As described above, there are 10 prize balls based on the winning of the first variable winning device 32A and the second variable winning device 32B, and the prizes obtained in the normal opening / closing execution mode and the V probability variation opening / closing execution mode. The number of balls is the same. On the other hand, in the normal opening / closing execution mode, only the first variable winning device 32A is awarded, and in the V probability variation opening / closing execution mode, the first variable winning device 32A and the second variable winning device 32B are won. Therefore, in the V-probability change opening / closing execution mode, it may flow into the V-winning area 356 (detected by the V-winning detection sensor 362) based on the winning of the second variable winning device 32B. Then, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is determined by whether or not the game ball is detected by the detection sensor 362 for V winning during the opening / closing execution mode.

More specifically, when the game ball is detected by the detection sensor 362 for V winning during the opening / closing execution mode, the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high probability mode. The high-probability mode continues until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit and the state shifts to the big hit state. On the other hand, if the game ball is not detected by the detection sensor 362 for V winning during the opening / closing execution mode, the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low probability mode. The low-probability mode continues until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit and the state shifts to the big hit state.

That is, when the jackpot result shifts to the normal opening / closing execution mode, the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the low probability mode, and when the jackpot result shifts to the V probability variation opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing execution mode The later win / fail lottery mode can shift to the high probability mode. As described above, in the present embodiment, the game ball that has won the second variable winning device 32B is guided to the V winning area 356 with a 100% probability, and shifts to the V probability change opening / closing execution mode. If a big hit result is obtained and a prize is generated in the second variable winning device 32B, the winning / losing lottery mode is set to shift to the high probability mode after that with a 100% probability. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the height of the subsequent winning / failing lottery mode is determined by the type of opening / closing execution mode to be shifted, and the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is not determined depending on the type of jackpot result.

In relation to each of the above game states, the normal game state means a state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode.

Explaining each jackpot result shown in the distribution table in FIG. 11 in more detail, the opening / closing execution mode to be shifted and the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode are set to be different in height.

The jackpot result without V is a jackpot result in which the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode is terminated while shifting to the normal opening / closing execution mode. In other words, the V-less jackpot result is a game result that substantially shifts the game state after the open / close execution mode to the normal game state that becomes the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

The first V presence jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode after the transition to the V probability variation opening / closing execution mode and the end of the opening / closing execution mode. In other words, the jackpot result with the first V is a game result that substantially shifts the game state after the open / close execution mode to the first probability change state that becomes the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

The second V presence jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the transition to the V probability variation opening / closing execution mode and the end of the opening / closing execution mode. In other words, the second V jackpot result is a game result that substantially shifts the game state after the open / close execution mode to the second probability change state that becomes the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode.

As described above, when the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 331 tends to be in the support state, and as a result, the probability of winning the right first operating port 33B increases. Therefore, in the second probable change state in which the high frequency support mode is set, the second firing is performed so as to flow down the right side region PE3 rather than letting the left side region PE2 flow down and aiming at the lower first operating port 33A in the first firing operation. It is advantageous for the player to fire the game ball by the operation because it is possible to receive the winning / failing lottery on the first special drawing side without reducing the number of balls held so much.

On the other hand, even if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, that is, the electric accessory 331 is unlikely to be in the support state, and even if the winning probability to the right first operating port 33B is low, the second is such that the right region PE3 flows down. When the game ball is launched by the firing operation, the game ball can enter the second operating port 34. As described above, when the game ball is launched by the second launch operation, the game ball passes through the guidance passage W1 and reaches the branch passage W2. Then, in the branch passage W2 in the present embodiment, half of the reached game balls are branched to the right branch passage W3 on the second operating port 34 side. Further, in the present embodiment, each passage is formed so that spilled balls are less likely to occur in each passage W1 to W3. Therefore, even in the low-frequency support mode, half of the game balls launched in the second launch operation enter the second operating port 34, and it is possible to receive a winning / failing lottery on the second special drawing side. ..

Therefore, even in the low probability mode such as the normal game state or the first high probability state, if the first firing operation is performed, the winning / losing lottery on the first special drawing side based on the winning of the lower first operating port 33A is received. If the second launch operation is performed, it is possible to receive a winning / failing lottery on the second special drawing side based on the winning of the second operating port 34.

As shown in FIG. 10, the probability of a big hit result is the same in the winning / failing table for the first special drawing and the winning / failing table for the second special drawing regardless of the level of the winning / failing lottery mode. On the other hand, both win / fail tables are set so that the probabilities of special deviation results are different.

Here, the special deviation result is that the opening / closing control (opening / closing of the large winning opening 321) is performed once by the first variable winning device 32A, and one opening is until 6 sec (second period) elapses or the large winning is won. This is the result of the game of shifting to the open / close execution mode, which is continued until the number of winnings in the mouth 321 reaches 3 (second number). That is, in the special off result, the opening period of the big winning opening 321 is shorter and the number of times of opening and closing is set to be smaller than the opening / closing execution mode of any big hit result, and the number of prize balls obtained is small. In the present embodiment, one game ball is set to be launched toward the game area PE every 0.6 sec in a state where the launch condition is satisfied (a state in which the launch operation device 28 is operated). There is. As described above, the opening time of the large winning opening 321 based on the special deviation result is set longer than the product of the firing cycle and the winning limit number (3 pieces). Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode based on the special deviation result, the winning limit number of game balls can be expected to be won, and the winning balls can be obtained accordingly.

As shown in FIG. 10, between the 1st special figure winning / failing table and the 2nd special drawing winning / failing table, the 2nd special drawing winning / failing table is the 1st special figure winning / failing table regardless of the level of the winning / failing lottery mode. It is set so that the probability of a special deviation result is higher than that of the table. Therefore, as described above, even in the low probability mode such as the normal game state or the first high probability state, if the second firing operation is performed, the second special figure side is correct or not based on the winning of the second operating port 34. If you can receive a lottery and get a special result, you can win a prize ball by winning the first variable winning device 32A (effectively 3 prizes x 10 prize balls, 30 prize balls). Obtainable.

However, the probability of a special deviation result in the second special figure winning / failing table is set to 1/30 in this embodiment, and the number of prize balls based on the winning of the second operating port 34 is one. It has been set. Assuming that in the normal game state, the second operating port 34 is aimed at, that is, the game is performed in which the game ball is launched by performing the second firing operation, the ball is entered into the second operating port 34 and the special deviation result ( In order to obtain (30 prize balls), it is necessary to fire at least about 60 (1/2 x 1/30) game balls on average, which is larger than the number of prize balls obtained as a result of special deviation. The number of launch balls is larger than that. Furthermore, the probability of a jackpot result in the normal game state is set to 1/300, and the jackpot result (400 prize balls, 5 rounds x 8 prizes x 10 pieces) is set by entering the second operating port 34. ), It is necessary to fire at least about 600 (1/2 x 1/300) game balls on average, which is more than the number of prize balls obtained from the jackpot result. There are more. Then, the merit of operating the second launch operation in the normal game state is low, and in particular, the number of prize balls based on the winning of the second operating port 34 from the number of launched balls (the number of prize balls of the second operating port 34 + the opening / closing execution mode). The payout base after subtracting the number of prize balls based on) is negative.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display time based on each winning / failing lottery is made different, so that the digestion efficiency (digestion speed) of each winning / failing lottery is made different. The configuration will be described below.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the winning / failing lottery on the first special drawing side and the winning / failing lottery on the second special drawing side can be executed in parallel. Then, the result of both winning / failing lottery is notified by the variation display by the corresponding special figure display units 37a and 37b and the variation display of each symbol by the symbol display device 42. The period of these fluctuation displays is set by referring to the fluctuation display time table stored in the fluctuation display time table storage area 223 provided in the ROM 203 each time a chance of winning or losing lottery occurs. Then, in the present embodiment, the selected variable display time table is set for each game state, each winning / losing lottery trigger, and the game result.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the variable display time table in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), when the game result is a non-normal result, the variable display time table for the first special figure ( The variable display time for the second special figure is longer when the variable display time table (FIG. 12 (d)) is selected than when FIG. 12 (b) is selected. Each table is set. More specifically, when the variable display time table for the second special figure at the time of normal deviation is selected, the variable display time of 6000 sec is set, and it takes 1 hour or more (100 minutes) for one game. become. For example, if the business hours of the game hall are 10 hours, even if the game is aimed at the second operating port 34 in the normal game state, only 6 game times (lottery) can be performed. On the other hand, when the variable display time table for the first special drawing is selected, either at the time of big hit / special deviation (FIG. 12 (a)) or at the time of normal deviation (FIG. 12 (b)). If there is, 90 sec at the longest is selected. Therefore, the digestion efficiency in the normal gaming state is higher on the first special drawing side than on the second special drawing side, and the second firing operation is performed by performing the first firing operation and aiming at the lower first operating port 33A. The digestion efficiency is higher than aiming at the second operating port 34.

On the other hand, in the variation display time table in the first probability variation state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode), as shown in FIG. 13, when the game result is a normal deviation result, the variation for the second special figure. The variable display time for the first special figure is longer when the display time table (FIG. 13 (b)) is selected than when the display time table (FIG. 13 (d)) is selected. Each table is set so as to be. That is, the relationship between the normal game state and the length of the variable display time is reversed. Therefore, the digestion efficiency in the first probabilistic state is higher on the second special drawing side than on the first special drawing side, and it is better to perform the second firing operation and aim at the second operating port 34 to perform the first firing operation. Digestion efficiency is higher than aiming at the lower first operating port 33A. Then, in the first probability change state, the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, so that the probability of a big hit result is also high (see FIG. 10). Then, by aiming at the second operating port 34, it can be expected that a big hit result can be obtained with a relatively small number of games. Further, as described above, in the pass / fail table for the second special figure based on the winning of the second operating port 34, the probability of a special miss result is set higher than that in the pass / fail table for the first special figure. Therefore, in the first probability change state, by performing the second launch operation and winning the second operating port 34, it is possible to receive the winning / failing lottery on the second special drawing side without reducing the number of balls held so much. ..

In the fluctuation display time table in the second probability change state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), as shown in FIG. 14, when the game result is a normal deviation result, the fluctuation display time for the first special figure The variable display time for the second special figure is longer when the table (FIG. 14 (b)) is selected than when the table (FIG. 14 (b)) is selected. Each table is set so as to. That is, the relationship of the length of the fluctuation display time is reversed between the first probability variation state and the second probability variation state. Therefore, the digestion efficiency in the second probabilistic state is higher on the first special figure side than on the second special figure side. However, since the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode in the second probability change state, the ball entry rate is higher when aiming at the right first operating port 33B than when aiming at the lower first operating port 33A. More specifically, since the electric accessory 331 provided in the right first operating port 33B is frequently in the support state, the frequency of winning the right first operating port 33B increases, and the right first operating port 33B By obtaining the prize balls (3 pieces) accompanying the winning of the prize, it is possible to receive the winning / failing lottery on the first special drawing side without reducing the number of balls held so much.

Returning to the description of each counter (FIG. 9), the reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area RA for the first special drawing of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 33, and the second special drawing of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operating port 34. It is stored in the reserved area RB. Then, it is decided whether or not to generate the reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203 (see FIGS. 12 to 14).

Here, the reach display (reach state) is a game in which a symbol display device 42 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (picture) is provided, and the variable winning devices 32A and 32B are opened and closed. In a game machine in which the stop display result after the variable display is a special display result, the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 42 is started. In the previous stage, it refers to a display state for making the player think that the special display result is likely to be a variable display state.

In other words, by stopping and displaying some of the symbols among the plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 42, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is established. It is a display state in which a combination of possible reach symbols is displayed, and in that state, the symbols are variablely displayed in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a pre-stage for ending the variable display of the symbol, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is established on the preset effective line in the display screen of the symbol display device 42. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of possible reach symbols, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence.

To specifically explain the display contents of FIG. 5, first, high-speed fluctuation display is started for all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or impossible to recognize which symbol is displayed. After that, the variation display mode of the upper symbol sequence Z1 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display in which the player can easily or can recognize the symbol displayed. Then, the variation display of the upper symbol sequence Z1 is completed, and the variation display mode of the lower symbol sequence Z3 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display. After that, the variable display of the lower symbol sequence Z3 ends. In this case, the reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the same numbers on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. Then, when the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display and the open / close execution mode occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is attached. Is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the variation display of the symbols in the symbol row Z2 in the middle row is terminated.

Further, in the reach display, in the state where the combination of the reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to reach the reach. Includes those that perform the effect, and those that perform the reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen after reducing or hiding the combination of reach symbols. In addition, when the reach display is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to perform the notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. You may.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS determines in the MPU 202 the variation display time in the first special symbol display unit 37a and the second special symbol display unit 37b of the special symbol display unit 37 and the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 42. Used in. The variation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the variable type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area RA for the first special drawing of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33, and the second special drawing of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the second operating port 34 It is stored in the reserved area RB.

The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, reach the maximum value (that is, 250), and then return to 0. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric service holding area R of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 331 to the open state according to the value of the stored electric accessory opening counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 190, the electric accessory 331 is controlled to the open state, and if C4 = 191 to 250, the electric accessory 331 is not controlled to the open state.

As described above, in the MPU 202, the fluctuation display time in the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b is used by using the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in each execution area RAE and RBE. Although it is determined, the variable display time table storage area 223 of ROM 203 is used in the determination. Further, in the MPU 202, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the respective execution areas RAE and RBE are used to stop the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. The result is determined, and the stop result table storage area 224 of the ROM 203 is used in the determination.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 81>
Next, the timer interrupt process and the normal process executed in advancing the game in each game time by the MPU 202 in the main control device 81 will be described. In the MPU 202, in addition to the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing, the main processing activated when the power is turned on and the NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) are executed. However, description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is periodically activated by the MPU 202 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 81 is read, and the state of the detection sensor (detection information from the detection sensor) is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. For example, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the large winning opening 321, the winning detection flag for the large winning opening is stored. When a prize is generated in the second variable winning device 32B (the game ball is detected by the counting detection sensor 361), the winning detection flag for winning the second variable winning device 32B is stored. Further, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the V winning area 356, the detection flag for V winning is stored. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the discharge area 357, the discharge detection flag is stored. In a configuration that does not have other sensors, such as a configuration that does not provide the second variable winning device 32B, the configuration may be such that the state reading process of those sensors is not performed.

After that, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

In the following step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

In the following step S104, a winning process for thru accompanying the winning of the thru gate 35 is executed. In the through winning process, it is determined whether or not the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the RAM 204, and if the flag is stored, the winning combination stored in the electric service holding area R is held. On condition that the number of stored items is less than 4, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric accessory holding area R. In addition, a process of updating the display (display of the number of held items) of the normal figure hold display unit 41 is performed in correspondence with the number of stored items on hold that has been updated by this acquisition. Then, the winning detection flag is cleared and the winning process for the through gate is completed.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105, and in the step S105, the winning process for the operating port accompanying the winning of the operating ports 33A, 33B, 34 is executed, and this timer interrupt process is executed. To finish.

<Prize processing for operating port>
Here, the winning process for the operating port will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S201, whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in any of the first operating ports 33A or 33B depends on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the lower first operating port 33A and the right first operating port 33B. judge. When it is determined that the game ball has won a prize in any of the first operating ports 33A and 33B, in step S202, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 77 to pay out three game balls is set. In the following step S203, the value stored in the hold number storage area (first hold number storage area NA) of the first special figure hold area RA is read and held and stored in the first special figure hold area RA. It is determined whether or not the first start hold storage number RaN is less than the maximum storable number (4). If it is less than the maximum number, in step S204, a process of adding 1 to the first start hold storage number RaN is executed. After that, in step S205, information acquisition processing for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS is performed. In the following step S206, the confirmation process for the first hold notice is executed. In such a process, the information that the first operating ports 33A and 33B have been won is output to the effect control device 82 side, and the hold acquired based on the winning of the first operating ports 33A and 33B this time. A process is performed in which information on the game times (information such as whether or not a hit / fail determination is made, whether or not a reach is generated, whether or not a notice effect is generated) is output to the effect control device 82 side.

If a negative determination is made in any of step S201 and step S203, or after the process of step S206 is executed, the process proceeds to step S207. In step S207, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second operating port 34 (starting winning) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second operating port 34. When it is determined that the game ball has won the second operating port 34, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 77 to pay out one game ball is set in step S208. In the following step S209, the value stored in the hold number storage area (second hold number storage area NB) of the second special figure hold area RB is read and held and stored in the second special figure hold area RB. It is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN is less than the maximum storable number (4). If it is less than the maximum number, the process of adding 1 to the first start hold storage number RaN is executed in step S210. After that, in step S211, information acquisition processing for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS is performed. In the following step S212, the confirmation process for the second hold notice is executed. In such a process, the information that the winning of the second operating port 34 has occurred is output to the effect control device 82 side, and the game about the hold information acquired based on the winning of the second operating port 34 this time. A process is performed in which information on the times (information on whether or not the result is determined, whether or not reach has occurred, whether or not a notice effect has occurred, etc.) is output to the effect control device 82 side. If a negative determination is made in any of step S207 and step S209, or after the process of step S212 is executed, the winning process for the main operating port ends.

The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S208 is transmitted to the payout control device 77 in the external output process of the normal process described later. Further, the hold information command (hold command) set in steps S206 and S212 is also transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process. These hold commands include information on which of the first operating ports 33A and 33B and the second operating port 34 is based on the winning, in the effect control device 82. By receiving the hold command, a process for changing the display in the special figure display areas Ga and Gb corresponding to the increase in the number of holds is executed.

Specifically, when the command received by the display control device 212 via the effect control device 82 corresponds to winning a prize in any of the first operating ports 33A and 33B, the display screen. The process for displaying the holding image in the special figure display area Ga for the first operating port set in 42a is executed (see FIG. 5B). In the special figure display area Ga for the first operating port, the reserved images are sequentially displayed from the right side. For example, if the first start holding storage number RaN for the first operating port is 1, the rightmost second is displayed. The hold image is displayed in the 1-unit hold display area Ga1, and if the first start hold storage number RaN is 4, the hold image is displayed in all the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4. Further, when the command received by the display control device 212 via the effect control device 82 corresponds to the winning of the second operating port 34, the second set on the display screen 42a. A process for displaying the reserved image in the special figure display area Gb for the operation port is executed (see FIG. 5B). In the special figure display area Gb for the second operating port, the reserved images are sequentially displayed from the left side. For example, if the second start holding storage number RbN for the second operating port is 1, the leftmost second is The hold image is displayed in the 1-unit hold display area Gb1, and if the start hold storage number RbN is 4, the hold image is displayed in all the unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in the normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S301 to S307 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S309 and S310 are executed in the remaining time.

In the normal processing, first, the external signal output processing is executed in step S301. In the external signal output process of step S301, output data such as a timer interrupt process or a command set in the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 77. If an effect command such as a variation command, a type command, a variation end command, or a hold command is set, it is transmitted to the effect control device 82.

Next, in step S302, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

In the following step S303, the first game time control process for controlling the game in each game time based on the winning of any of the first operating ports 33A and 33B is executed. In this first game time control process, a jackpot determination on the first special symbol side, a setting of a symbol variation display by the symbol display device 42, a display control of the first special symbol display unit 37a, and the like are performed.

After executing the first game time control process of step S303, the process proceeds to step S304, and the second game time control process for controlling the game in each game time based on the winning of the second operating port 34 is executed. In this second game time control process, a jackpot determination on the second special symbol side, a setting of a symbol variation display by the symbol display device 42, a display control of the second special symbol display unit 37b, and the like are performed.

After each game round control process is executed in step S303 and step S304, the game state transition process is executed in step S305. By this game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. The details of the processes of steps S303 to S305 will be described later.

In the following step S306, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 331 provided in the right first operating port 33B is executed. In this electric service support process, the electric service is released depending on whether or not the electric service 331 is opened by using the numerical information acquired from the electric service release counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area R of the RAM 204. A lottery is performed, and when the electric accessory is won in the open state, the electric accessory 331 is opened and closed. In addition, the display control of the general drawing display unit 38 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric service opening lottery.

Here, as described above, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are set as the support modes by the electric accessory 331, and the game state transition process shifts to either support mode. Be told. Through this process, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204, the high-frequency support mode is set, and when the flag is not set, the low-frequency support mode is set.

In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. Then, in the case of the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 331 is in the open state is set more than in the case of the low frequency support mode, and once, when the electric service open state is won. Set a long opening time. Further, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric accessory open state is won and the electric accessory 331 is opened a plurality of times, the next open state is started after one open state is completed. The closing time is set to be shorter than the one-time opening time.

By the way, when the mode is changed to the open / close execution mode, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode even if the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204.

After that, in step S307, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 27 is excited once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that the launch permission signal is input from the power supply and the launch control device 78. .. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

In the following step S308, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached.

That is, in step S309, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 204. Further, in step S310, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is added by 1, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter values are cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 204.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S301 to S307 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, and similarly. The variable type counter CS can also be updated at random.

<1st game time control process>
Next, the first game round control process in step S303 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 18 to 22.

In the first game round control process, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag (open / close execution state information) is stored (stored) in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. The open / close execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is deleted when the open / close execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process.

When the open / close execution mode is in progress, this game is performed without executing any of the processes after step S402, that is, the game round start process of steps S403 to S407 and the game round progress process of steps S408 to S414. Time Control processing ends. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the game round on the first special drawing side is started regardless of whether or not any of the first operating ports 33A and 33B has been won. Absent.

If it is not in the open / close execution mode, it is determined in step S402 whether or not the first special figure display unit 37a is in the variable display. It should be noted that this determination is performed by determining whether or not the first variation display display flag (first variation display display information) is stored (stored) in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. The first variation display flag is stored when the variation display is started for the first special figure display unit 37a, and is deleted when the variation display ends.

If the first special figure display unit 37a is not in the variable display, the process proceeds to the game round start process of steps S403 to S407. In the game round start process, first, in step S403, it is determined whether or not the first start hold storage number RaN is "0". When the first start hold storage number RaN is "0", it means that neither the lower first operating port 33A nor the right first operating port 33B has been won. Therefore, the first game round control process is terminated as it is. If the first start hold storage number RaN is not "0", it is determined in step S404 whether or not the second winning flag or the special loss flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. The second winning flag is a flag that is stored when a big hit is won in the lottery on the second special drawing side and is erased at the end of the opening / closing execution mode based on the big hit. Further, the special deviation flag is a flag that is stored based on the special deviation result and is deleted at the end of the open / close execution mode based on the special deviation result. If the second winning flag or the special loss result flag is stored, the first game round control process is terminated as it is.

That is, in the present embodiment, while the lottery system on the first special drawing side and the lottery system on the second special drawing side can be executed in parallel, if one lottery system becomes a big hit, the other It is configured to limit the start of the lottery-type game times. By doing this, it is possible to avoid an event in which one lottery system wins a big hit, but the result of the other lottery system is too worrisome to concentrate on the big hit. It becomes.

Further, not only the big hit in the other lottery system but also the special loss result is configured to limit the start of the game round of the other lottery system based on the result. By doing so, it is possible to avoid an event in which the opening / closing execution mode is duplicated due to the start of the game round that results in a big hit in the other lottery system during the execution of the game round that results in a special loss. Is possible.

As described above, in the present embodiment, while a plurality of lottery systems can be implemented in parallel, a result that can limit the other is set. In other words, these multiple lottery systems may be carried out in parallel or independently, and we would like to attract attention while improving the efficiency and playability of the lottery by parallel lottery. It is possible to make the lottery system on the side stand out.

When the second winning flag or the special loss flag is not stored in step S404, the first data setting for setting the data stored in the holding area RA for the first special figure for variable display in step S405. The process is executed, and further, in step S406, the first variation start process for starting the variation display in the first special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 42 is executed. Then, after the fluctuation command and the type command for starting these fluctuation displays are set to be transmitted in step S407, the first game round control process is terminated. The variation command and the type command are transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process. The effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 based on the received variation command and type command to start the game rotation effect such as the variation display of the symbol on the display screen 42a.

Here, the first data setting process in step S405 and the first fluctuation start process in step S406 will be described in detail below.

First, the first data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the data setting process, first, in step S501, a process of subtracting "1" from the first start hold storage number RaN is executed. In the following step S502, the data stored in the first area RA1 of the first special drawing reservation area RA is moved to the first execution area RAE. In the following step S503, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure reservation area RA is executed. This data shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the first area RA1 to the fourth area RA4 in order to the lower area side, clearing the data of the first area RA1 and the second area RA2 → The data in each area is shifted such as 1st area RA1, 3rd area RA3 → 2nd area RA2, 4th area RA4 → 3rd area RA3. After that, in step S504, the first shift command (first shift command) is information for causing the effect control device 82, which is the control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data of the first special drawing reservation area RA has been shifted. 1 shift occurrence information) is set. In this case, from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the hold area RA for the first special figure, that is, one of the first operations A first shift command including information that the ports 33A and 33B are supported is selected, and the selected first shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. After that, this data setting process ends.

The first shift command set in step S504 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. Based on the received first shift command, the effect control device 82 holds the display in the first special figure holding display unit 43a of the variable display unit 36 and the display in the first special figure display area Ga of the symbol display device 42. Execute the process to change according to the decrease in the number.

Next, the process for starting the first fluctuation in step S406 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the first fluctuation start process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag (high probability state information) is stored (stored) in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. The high probability mode flag is stored based on the fact that the game ball has passed the V winning area 356 in the second variable winning device 32B in the V probability variation opening / closing execution mode, and when any of the jackpot results occurs thereafter. It is a flag to be erased.

If it is not in the high probability mode, the pass / fail table for the low probability mode is acquired in step S602, and the pass / fail judgment is performed in step S604. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first execution area RAE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the first special figure in the low probability mode. (FIG. 10 (a)). On the other hand, in the case of the high probability mode, the pass / fail table for the high probability mode is acquired in step S602, and the pass / fail judgment is performed in step S604. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first execution area RAE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / failing table for the first special figure in the high probability mode. Is determined (FIG. 10 (b)).

After the process of step S604, in steps S605 to S616, a process for setting the game result of the current game time is executed, and in the current game time, the first special figure display unit 37a is executed. Executes processing for setting the stop result when ending the variable display. In this case, when setting the stop result, various stop result tables (stop result information group) stored in the stop result table storage area 224 as the stop result information group storage means in the ROM 203 are referred to.

Specifically, first, in step S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S604 is a big hit. If the jackpot is won, in steps S606 to S612, a process for setting the game result and a process for setting the stop result in the case of the jackpot winning are executed.

In step S606, a process of storing the first winning flag in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204 is executed. The first winning flag is a flag that is stored when a big hit is won in the lottery on the first special drawing side and is erased at the end of the opening / closing execution mode based on the big hit. Although the details will be described later, by storing the first winning flag, processing for limiting the start of the game times on the second special figure side and canceling the variation display is performed.

In the following step S607, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the first special figure display unit (FIG. 11A). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first execution area RAE is included in the numerical range of the jackpot result without V or the numerical range of the jackpot result with the first V.

In step S608, based on the processing result of step S607, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is the first V and jackpot result. If the result is a jackpot with 1V, the process proceeds to step S609, and the stop result at which the jackpot result with 1V is generated is displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a. The stop result setting process for the jackpot with the first V for ending the fluctuation display of 37a is executed. Further, in step S610, the first V flag, which is information for indicating that the current game result is the first V and the jackpot result, is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204.

When a negative determination is made in step S608, it means that the jackpot result this time is a jackpot result without V. In this case, in step S611, in order to end the variable display of the first special figure display unit 37a in a state where the stop result at which the V-less jackpot result is generated is displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a. Executes the stop result setting process for the big hit without V. Further, in step S612, normal flags, which are information for indicating that the current game result is a V-less jackpot result, are stored in various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204.

If it is determined in step S605 that the result is not a jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S613 to determine whether or not the current deviation result is a special deviation result. If it is a special deviation result, the process proceeds to step S614, and the variation display of the first special figure display unit 37a is displayed in the state where the stop result at which the special deviation result occurs is displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a. Executes the stop result setting process for special deviation to end. Further, in step S615, the special deviation flag, which is information for indicating that the current game result is the special deviation result, is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. If it is determined in step S613 that the result is not a special deviation result, it means that the deviation result this time is a normal deviation result. In this case, in step S616, it is normal to end the variable display of the first special figure display unit 37a in a state where the stop result on which the normal deviation result occurs is displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a. Executes the stop result setting process for disconnection.

After executing any of the processes of step S610, step S612, step S615 and step S616, the process proceeds to step S617. In step S617, the first variation display time setting process is executed. After that, in step S618, the variation display on the first special figure display unit 37a is started, and then the first variation start process is ended.

Here, the process of setting the first variation display time in step S617 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S701, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode. When the low frequency support mode is used instead of the high frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S702 to determine whether or not the current winning / losing lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the case of the low probability mode instead of the high probability mode in step S702, that is, in the normal gaming state of the low frequency support mode and the low probability mode, the variation display time table for the normal gaming state in step S703. To get.

As shown in FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (b), the variable display time table for the normal gaming state is a variable display time table when either the jackpot result or the special deviation result is obtained (FIG. 12 (a)). ) And the variation display time table (FIG. 12B) in the case of a normal deviation result are set, and the corresponding variation is based on the results of the respective processes of step S610, step S612, and step S615 described above. Select a display time table. That is, if any of the first V flag, the normal flag, and the special deviation flag is stored, the fluctuation display time table of FIG. 12A is acquired, and if none of the flags is stored (normal deviation result). If there is), the variable display time table of FIG. 12B is acquired. In each fluctuation display time table, the fluctuation display time is set to be different depending on the reach random number counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS, and the first start hold storage number RaN at the start of fluctuation among the hold information. More specifically, the presence or absence of reach occurrence is basically determined by the reach random number counter C3, and when the fluctuation display time between the time when reach does not occur and the time when reach occurs is compared, the time when reach occurs is higher than the time when reach does not occur. It is easy to select a long variable display time. Further, when reach occurs, the type of reach differs depending on the values of the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter CS. Normal reach A and B and super reach A to C are set as the types of reach. Normal reach A and super reach A to C are reach in which the same variable display time is set regardless of the number of first start hold storage numbers RaN. Then, the variable display time is set to be longer in the order of normal reach A, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C, and the longest variable display time is selected for super reach C. On the other hand, in the normal reach B and when the reach does not occur, basically, the larger the value of the first start hold storage number RaN, the easier it is to select a shorter fluctuation display time. In this embodiment, the longer the variable display time is selected, the higher the expectation of the jackpot result or the special deviation result is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S701 and an affirmative determination is made in step S702, that is, in the case of the first probability variation state of the low frequency support mode and the high probability mode, the variation display for the first probability variation state is in step S704. Get the time table.

As shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b), the variation display time table for the first probability variation state is a variation display time table when either the jackpot result or the special deviation result is obtained (FIG. 13 (a). )) And the variation display time table (FIG. 13 (b)) in the case of a normal deviation result are set, and the corresponding processing is performed based on the results of the respective processes of step S610, step S612, and step S615 described above. Select a variable display time table. That is, if any of the first V flag, the normal flag, and the special deviation flag is stored, the fluctuation display time table of FIG. 13 (a) is acquired, and if none of the flags is stored (normal deviation result). If there is), the variable display time table of FIG. 13B is acquired. In the fluctuation display time table in the first probability change state, the long-time mode and the short-time are relatively long and short regardless of the reach random number counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS, the first start hold storage number RaN at the start of fluctuation, and the like. The mode is determined according to the game result. That is, if it is any of the jackpot results or the special deviation result, the variation display time of 10 sec, which is the short-time mode, is selected, and if it is the normal deviation result, the variation display time of 6000 sec, which is the long-time aspect, is selected. That is, in the first probabilistic state, the digestion efficiency on the first special figure side is set to be low except when any of the jackpot results or the special deviation result is obtained.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S701, that is, in the high frequency support mode, it means that the current gaming state is the second probability changing state. In this case, the variation display time table for the second probability variation state is acquired in step S705.

As shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (b), the variation display time table for the second probability variation state is the variation display time table when either the jackpot result or the special deviation result is obtained (FIG. 14 (a). )) And the variation display time table (FIG. 14 (b)) in the case of a normal deviation result are set, and the corresponding processing is performed based on the results of the respective processes of step S610, step S612, and step S615 described above. Select a variable display time table. The distribution of the variable display time in these variable display time tables is basically the same as the variable display time table in the normal gaming state. That is, the fluctuation display time is set to be different depending on the reach random number counter C3 of the hold information, the fluctuation type counter CS, and the first start hold storage number RaN at the start of the fluctuation. However, in the variable display time table in the second probability variation state, it is easy to select a time shorter than the variable display time in the normal gaming state, and it is set so that the digestion efficiency of the lottery system on the first special drawing side is high. ing.

After executing any of the processes of steps S703 to S705, the variation display time in the game times on the first special drawing side of this time is displayed in step S706 with reference to the variation display time table acquired in each process. After executing the setting process, the setting process of the first variable display time ends. The various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 are provided with a first progress counter and a second progress counter that separately count the fluctuation display times of the game times on the first special figure side and the game times on the second special figure side. ing. Each of these progress counters is a counter that is decremented by 1 in a predetermined cycle (2 msec), and the MPU 202 can grasp the remaining fluctuation display time of the current game times by referring to the progress counter. ing. Then, in step S706, the process of inputting the numerical information corresponding to the variation display time selected this time to the first progress counter that counts the variation display time of the game times on the first special figure side is executed.

Returning to the description of the first game round control process (FIG. 18), if it is determined in step S402 that the variation display of the first special figure display unit 37a is being performed, the process proceeds to step S408. In step S408, it is determined whether or not the variation display time in the game times on the first special drawing side has elapsed with reference to the first progress counter. If it is determined that the lapse has not passed, in step S409, whether or not the second winning flag is stored in the RAM 204, that is, whether or not any of the big hit results has occurred in the lottery system on the second special drawing side. Determine if not. If the second winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S410, the variation display process is executed, and then the first game round control process ends. The variation display process is a process for performing variation display (light emission control of the light emitting unit) on the first special figure display unit 37a.

If it is determined in step S409 that the second winning flag is stored, the process for forced termination in steps S411 and S412 is performed. These processes will be described in detail later.

If the variation display time has elapsed in step S408 and it is the end timing of the game round on the first special drawing side, the process proceeds to step S413. In step S413, the variable end processing is executed. In such a process, the first special figure display unit 37a is controlled so that the stop result set in any of the processes of step S609, step S611, step S614 and step S616 is displayed. Then, after setting the variation end command in step S414, the first game round control process is ended. The variable end command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 so that the variation display of the symbol being executed ends as a stop result corresponding to the current game result based on the reception of the variation end command.

Here, the process for forced termination in steps S411 and S412 will be described. In the present embodiment, a case is set in which the game round ends in the middle, except when the variable display time set at the start of the game round elapses. As described above, in the present embodiment, both the lottery system of the first special figure and the second special figure are executed in parallel, and the game round ends except when the above fluctuation display time has elapsed. Is the case where a big hit result occurs in the other lottery system.

That is, in the forced termination process of step S411, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22, a process of rewriting the game result of the changing game times in step S801 to an out-of-normal result is executed. Here, in the present embodiment, although both lottery systems are executed in parallel, the jackpot results cannot be generated at the same time in both lottery systems. That is, as in step S404, at the start of the lottery on the first special figure side, the determination process of whether or not a big hit has occurred in the lottery system on the other second special figure side is performed. Then, if a big hit occurs, the lottery on the first special drawing side is set not to be carried out. The second game round control process on the second special figure side will be described later, but basically the processing configuration is the same as the process on the first special figure side, and similarly, the jackpot is on the first special figure side. If it has occurred, the lottery on the second special drawing side is set not to be carried out. By doing so, when the game round is terminated in the middle and rewritten to the normal out-of-order result, that is, when the process of step S801 is performed, the jackpot result is not extinguished, which is disadvantageous to the player. Is avoided.

After executing the process of step S801, the value of the first progress counter is set to 0 in step S802. As a result, the variation display time of the game times on the first special drawing side becomes 0. After that, the forced termination process is terminated. After executing the forced termination process in step S411, the forced termination command is set in step S412, and then the first game round control process is terminated. The forced end command is output to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The effect control device 82 performs a process of forcibly ending the game times being executed based on the reception of the forced end command. However, the case where the forced termination command is set is the case where a big hit occurs in the other lottery system (in the above case, the second special drawing side). Therefore, the effect control device 82 displays and controls the display control device 212 so that the game round is terminated after the variable display of the symbol being executed is set as the stop result corresponding to the jackpot result based on the reception of the forced end command. To do. By doing so, it is possible for a player who has enjoyed the game times to avoid an extremely low motivation for the game due to the deprivation of the enjoyment on the way.

<Second game round control process>
Next, the second game round control process of 304 in the normal process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 23 to 26. Since the second game time control process is basically the same process as the first game time control process, the differences will be mainly described.

That is, in the second game round control process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in the same manner as in step S401. In the open / close execution mode, the second game round control process is terminated as it is. In step S902, it is determined whether or not the variation display of the second special figure display unit 37b is in progress. If the variation is not displayed, in step S903, it is determined whether or not the hold information on the second special figure side is stored by referring to the second start hold storage number RbN. If the hold information on the second special drawing side is stored, it is determined in step S904 whether or not the first winning flag or the special loss flag is stored. If none of them is stored, the second data setting process is executed in step S905, the second variation start process is executed in step S906, and then the variation command and the type command are produced and controlled in step S907. After setting as a transmission target to the device 82, the second game round control process is terminated.

The second data setting process in step S905 corresponds to the first data setting process. That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 24, the subtraction process of the second start hold storage number RbN is performed in step S1001, and the hold information of the first area RB1 in the second special figure hold area RB is obtained in step S1002. 2 Performs the process of moving to the execution area RBE. After that, in step S1003, shift processing of each area RB1 to RB4 is performed, and in step S1004, a second shift command (second shift generation information) is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 82, and then the second End the data setting process. Based on the received second shift command, the effect control device 82 holds the display on the second special figure holding display unit 43b of the variable display unit 36 and the display on the second special figure display area Gb of the symbol display device 42. Execute the process to change according to the decrease in the number.

The second variation start process in step S906 corresponds to the first variation start process. That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 25, in steps S1101 to S1105, a process for determining the game result in the game times on the second special drawing side is executed. In this case, in step S1102, unlike step S602, the second special figure hit / miss table (FIG. 10 (c)) in the low probability mode is acquired, and in step S1103, unlike step S603, the second in the high probability mode is acquired. 2 Acquire the winning / failing table for special figures (FIG. 10 (d)). As already explained, in the lottery system on the first special drawing side and the second special drawing side, the probability of getting a big hit result is the same, but the probability of getting a special off result is different in each lottery system. More specifically, the probability that the second special drawing side will result in a special deviation is higher than that of the first special drawing side.

After performing the hit / fail determination process in step S1104, it is determined in step S1105 whether or not the game result of the game times on the second special drawing side this time is a jackpot result. If it is a jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S1106 and the process of storing the second winning flag in the RAM 204 is executed. By this process, it is possible to make an affirmative decision in step S404 to limit the start of the game times on the first special figure side, or to make an affirmative decision in step S409 to forcibly end the game times on the first special figure side. It will be possible.

In step S1107, the distribution determination process is executed. In such a process, unlike step S607, the distribution table for the second special figure (FIG. 11B) is acquired, and the type of the jackpot result of this time is determined. As already explained, in the distribution table for the second special figure, the distribution corresponding to the jackpot result without V is not set, and it is set so as to be distributed to the jackpot result with 1V or the jackpot result with 2V. ing.

In step S1108, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot result is the jackpot result with the first V. If the result is a jackpot with 1V, the processing for the jackpot result with 1V is performed in steps S1109 and S1110. The processing of step S1109 and step S1110 is the same as the processing of step S609 and step S610.

When it is determined in step S1108 that the result is not the jackpot result with the first V, it means that the jackpot result this time is the jackpot result with the second V. In this case, in step S1111, the stop result setting process for the jackpot with the second V is executed. Specifically, processing is performed to end the variable display of the second special figure display unit 37b in a state where the stop result at which the jackpot result with the second V is generated is displayed on the second special figure display unit 37b. .. Further, in step S1112, the second V flag, which is information for indicating that the current game result is the second V and the jackpot result, is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204.

If a negative determination is made in step S1105, the disengagement process is performed in steps S1113 to S1116. Since these processes are the same as the processes of steps S613 to S616, the description thereof will be omitted.

After executing any of the processes of step S1110, step S1112, step S1115 and step S1116, the process proceeds to step S1117. In step S1117, the second variable display time setting process is executed. After that, the process of starting the variation display is executed in step S1118, and then the second variation start process is terminated.

The second variation display time setting process in step S1117 corresponds to the first variation display time setting process. That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 26, the current gaming state is grasped by the determination process of whether or not the high frequency support mode is in step S1201 and the determination process of whether or not the mode is high probability mode in step S1202. To do. Then, in the case of the normal gaming state, the variation display time table in the normal gaming state is acquired in step S1203, and in the case of the first probability variation state, the variation display time table in the first probability variation state is acquired in step S1204. If it is in the second probability change state, the variation display time table in the second probability change state is acquired in step S1205. After that, in step S1206, the process of setting the variation display time in the second elapsed counter is executed, and then the process of setting the second variation display time ends.

However, the length of the variation display time that is easily set in each game state is different between the first special drawing side and the second special drawing side. That is, on the second special figure side, in the normal gaming state, 10 sec, which is a short-time mode, is selected for the jackpot result and the special deviation result (FIG. 12 (c)), while the other normal deviation results are used. If there is, 6000 sec, which is a long-time mode, is selected (FIG. 12 (d)). Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the digestion efficiency on the side of the second special figure is set to be low except when the result is either a big hit or a special loss.

That is, in the normal game state, the progress of the game is faster in the game on the first special figure side than in the game on the second special figure side. Further, the right first operating port 33B is set to have a low winning rate in the normal gaming state (low frequency support mode), and is set so as to hardly win a prize. Therefore, as a game on the first special drawing side, a game aiming at the lower first operating port 33A in the first launch mode (left-handed) and a game aiming at the right first operating port 33B in the second launch mode (right-handed). It can be said that it is preferable to aim at the lower first operating port 33A in the first launch mode in order to advance the game on the first special figure side rather than the game in the second launch mode.

Here, according to the second launch mode, it is considered that the ball can be expected to enter the second operating port 34, although the ball cannot be expected to enter the right first operating port 33B. Then, in the case of the game on the second special figure side based on the winning of the second operating port 34, the probability of winning or losing the lottery that will be a big hit is the same as the game on the first special figure side, but the probability of a special loss result is It is higher than the game on the first special drawing side (Fig. 10). Therefore, it is conceivable that an act of trying to advance the game on the second special figure side or the game on the first special figure side while obtaining the prize ball is performed by the opening / closing execution mode based on the special deviation result. However, as described above, the fluctuation display time of the game times on the second special figure side is set to 6000 sec if it is out of the normal range, so that the result of the first game on the second special figure side is assumed to be out of normal. Then, the chance of receiving the winning / failing lottery on the second special drawing side will be after 6000 seconds, and the merit of receiving the winning / failing lottery on the second special drawing side aiming at the special deviation result will be very low. From this point as well, in the normal game state, it can be said that the game aiming at the lower first operating port 33A in the first launch mode is a game in which the player is likely to benefit.

Further, in the first probability variation state on the second special figure side, the variation display time differs depending on the reach random number counter C3 of the pending information, the variation type counter CS, and the second start pending storage number RbN at the start of the variation. It is set (FIG. 13 (c) and FIG. 13 (d)). However, in the variation display time table in the first probability variation state, it is easy to select a time shorter than the variation display time on the first special figure side in the normal game state, and the lottery system on the first special figure side in the normal game state. The digestion efficiency of the lottery system on the second special figure side in the first probability variation state is set to be higher than the digestion efficiency of.

That is, when a game is performed in which a prize is generated in the first operating ports 33A and 33B in order to play the game on the first special drawing side in the first probability change state, the variable display time is a jackpot result or a special deviation result. Except for the case, since 6000 sec is selected, it becomes practically difficult to proceed with the game. In other words, even if the probability of winning or failing lottery is high as in the first probability change state, the lottery for the denominator of the probability is performed within the general business hours of the game hall (for example, 13 hours from 9:00 to 22:00). Becomes difficult. Then, if it is desired to obtain a big hit result in the first probability change state, it is considered that the player plays the recommended game (the game on the second special figure side, not the game on the first special figure side). Be done.

Further, even in the first probabilistic state, for example, in a situation where the normal gaming state has just changed to the first probabilistic state, the second operating port 34 has not been awarded and the second special drawing side. It is also assumed that the pending information of is not present. In this case, only the game times on the first special figure side will proceed, but as described above, if the result is out of the ordinary, a long fluctuation display time (6000 sec) will be set, so the second It can be said that sufficient time is secured until the reserved information on the special figure side is acquired. Further, as shown in FIGS. 13 (c) and 13 (d), the fluctuation display time set in the game times on the second special figure side in the first probability change state is 30 sec at the longest, and the winning / failing lottery. The total time of the fluctuation display time of the game times on the second special figure side of the denominator of the probability of is shorter than the fluctuation display time of the off-game times on the first special figure side. Therefore, in the first probability change state, it is set so that a big hit result (special deviation result) is likely to be obtained in the winning / failing lottery on the second special drawing side while the off-game round on the first special drawing side is being executed.

However, if a big hit result is obtained in the first game round on the 1st special figure side after shifting to the 1st probability change state, and there is no hold information on the 2nd special figure side, the swing on the 1st special figure side See the minute table (FIG. 11 (a)). As a result, despite the first probability change state, there is a possibility that the result will be distributed to the jackpot result without V. In this case, the game shifts to the normal game state without going through the second probability change state. Therefore, the player hopes that the first game on the first special figure side will not result in a big hit after shifting to the first probability change state, and avoids the event that the reserved information on the second special figure side does not exist. It is thought that the game is played like this. In that respect, the configuration is such that the open / close execution mode is performed before the transition to the first probability change state, and the recommended game in the open / close execution mode is the game in the second launch mode (right-handed). Further, if the game is performed in the second launch mode, a prize can be expected for the second operating port 34. Then, if the open / close execution mode is performed according to the recommended game, a prize will be generated for the second operating port 34 during the open / close execution mode, and the hold information on the second special figure side will be accumulated when shifting to the first probability change state. It is assumed that

In the second probability variation state on the second special figure side, as in the normal game state, 10 sec, which is a short-time mode, is selected for the jackpot result and the special deviation result (FIG. 14 (c)), while other than that. If the result is out of the normal range, 6000 sec, which is a long-term mode, is selected (FIG. 14 (d)). Therefore, in the second probabilistic state, the digestion efficiency on the second special figure side is set to be low except when any of the jackpot results or the special deviation result is obtained.

That is, when the right first operating port 33B is generated in the second firing mode in the second probability change state, the second operating port 34 may also be awarded, but the second operating port 34 In the game times on the 2nd special figure side based on the winning of, the variable display time of 6000 sec is selected except when it is a big hit result or a special miss result, so the game times on the 2nd special figure side substantially progress. It becomes difficult to make it. In other words, even if the probability of winning or losing lottery is high as in the second probability change state, the second special figure of the denominator of the probability is within the general business hours of the game hall (for example, 13 hours from 9:00 to 22:00). It becomes difficult to make the lottery on the side. Further, even in the second probability change state, for example, in a situation where the first game state has just changed to the second probability change state, the right first operating port 33B has not been awarded and the first special feature It is assumed that there is no pending information on the drawing side. In this case, only the game times on the second special figure side will proceed, but as described above, if the result is out of the ordinary, a long fluctuation display time (6000 sec) will be set, so the first It can be said that sufficient time is secured until the reserved information on the special figure side is acquired. Further, as shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (b), the fluctuation display time set in the game times on the first special drawing side in the second probability change state is 30 seconds at the longest, and the winning / failing lottery. The total time of the fluctuation display time of the game times on the first special figure side of the denominator of the probability of is shorter than the fluctuation display time of the off-game times on the second special figure side. Therefore, in the second probability change state, it is set so that a big hit result (special deviation result) is likely to be obtained in the winning / failing lottery on the first special drawing side while the off-game round on the second special drawing side is being executed.

However, if a big hit result is obtained in the first game round on the 2nd special figure side after the transition to the 2nd probability change state, and there is no hold information on the 1st special figure side, the swing on the 2nd special figure side See the minute table (FIG. 11 (b)). However, if the distribution table on the second special figure side is selected in the first place, it is more advantageous for the player than the distribution table on the first special figure side is selected, so such an event is preferable for the player. Become. Therefore, even if the game times on the second special drawing side are prioritized in the second probability change state, it is considered that the inconvenience given to the player does not occur.

Returning to the explanation of the second game round control process (FIG. 23), if it is determined in step S902 that the variation is being displayed by the second special figure display unit 37b, the second progress counter is referred to in step S908. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation display time set at the start of the game round has elapsed. If the variation display time has not elapsed, it is determined in step S909 whether or not the first winning flag is stored in the RAM 204. This process corresponds to the process of step S409, and determines whether or not a big hit has occurred in the lottery on the first special figure side during the execution of the game round that results in the deviation of the second special figure side. This is a process for determining.

If it is determined in step S909 that the first winning flag is not stored, the variation display process for displaying the variation of the second special figure display unit 37b is executed in step S910, and then the second The game time control process is terminated. If it is determined in step S909 that the first winning flag is stored, the forced termination process is executed in step S911. Such a process is the same process as the process of FIG. 22, and executes a process of rewriting the game result of the game times being executed in step S801 (in this case, the game times on the second special figure side) to a non-normal result. Then, in step S802, the process of clearing the variable display time is performed. In this process, the game times on the second special drawing side that are being executed are forcibly terminated. Then, in step S912, the forced termination command is set as the transmission target to the effect control device 82, and the second game round control process is terminated. The effect control device 82 forcibly ends the variable display of the symbol for the first special figure being executed, and displays and controls the display control device 212 so that the game round ends as a stop result corresponding to the jackpot result. To do.

If it is determined in step S908 that the variation display time has elapsed, the variation end process is executed in step S913, and then the variation end command is set to be transmitted in step S914 to control the second game. End the process. The processes of steps S913 and S914 are the same as those of steps S413 and S414.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game times of the two lottery systems can be executed independently by the first game time control process and the second game time control process, and one of the lottery systems can be used. When a big hit occurs, the start of the other lottery-type game is restricted, or the running game is forcibly terminated. By doing so, even if a plurality of lottery systems are performed in parallel, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to each jackpot result.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given when a big hit result is obtained in one lottery system and the other lottery system is forcibly terminated. As described above, when the other lottery system is forcibly terminated, the remaining time of the variable display time is set to 0, and the variable display ends at that point. Then, in this case, the game result on the side to be forcibly terminated is usually rewritten as an out-of-game result. Therefore, in the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the side to be forcibly terminated displays the stop result corresponding to the normal deviation result without waiting for the end of the variable display time. The game round ends. Further, after that, since the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode on the side that has resulted in the big hit, the game round on the side that has been forcibly terminated is not started. Therefore, the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b on the forced termination side is usually left as a result of deviation.

On the display screen 42a, when the forced termination is performed, the game times by each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 being executed are rewritten to the stop result corresponding to the jackpot result, and the variable display ends. In this case, the fluctuation display time on the side that resulted in the jackpot is added, and the fluctuation display ends. That is, for example, if the game times that result in the jackpot on the second special figure side occur during the game times that result in the deviation of the first special figure side, the first special figure by each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 occurs. The game times that result in the side being off are rewritten to the game times of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 that result in the jackpot on the second special figure side. By doing so, in a configuration in which both lottery systems overlap, it is possible to avoid an event in which the player's attention is dispersed by making the variation display itself of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 one.

In the display screen 42a, the execution display areas GA and GB correspond to the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, and when the forced termination occurs, the execution on the side to be terminated The blinking of the display areas GA and GB is normally stopped so that the combination of display colors corresponding to the out-of-order result is displayed. Further, the blinking of the execution display areas GA and GB on the side where the jackpot result is obtained is stopped after the corresponding variation display time elapses, the combination of the display colors corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed.

<Game state transition process>
Next, the game state transition process in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 27 to 29.

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not the winning flag of any of the first winning flag and the second winning flag or the special loss flag is stored in the RAM 204. If neither flag is stored, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If any of the flags is stored, the process proceeds to step S1303, and it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation display of the corresponding game times. The timing determined by such processing is the end timing when the variable display time set at the start of the game round elapses and the game round ends as described above, and one of the lottery-type game rounds. This includes the end timing when the game times in the variable display are forcibly terminated when a big hit occurs in the other lottery system during the variable display. If it is not the end timing, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

If any of the end timings is reached, the process proceeds to step S1304 to execute the start processing of the open / close execution mode. In the start process, an opening waiting time (start waiting period) for waiting without starting the opening of the large winning opening 321 of the first variable winning device 32A for the opening of the opening / closing execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for opening stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204. In this case, the waiting time information that is set differs depending on the type of open / close execution mode, and the open / close execution mode corresponding to one of the jackpot results is the open / close execution corresponding to the special deviation result. The standby time is set to be longer than the mode. For example, in the open / close execution mode corresponding to any of the jackpot results, the count value of the waiting time information is set so that the waiting time is 1 sec, and in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the special deviation result, the waiting time is 0. The count value of the waiting time information is set so as to be .2 sec. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In the following step S1305, in order to set the number of rounds in the opening / closing execution mode this time, the presence / absence of the special off flag is confirmed. If the special disconnection flag is not stored and the opening / closing execution mode this time is based on one of the jackpot results, "5" is added to the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 in step S1306. In addition to executing the setting process, in step S1307, the process of storing the jackpot medium flag in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204 is executed. The round counter RC is for counting the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode, and the jackpot middle flag is a flag for the MPU 202 to grasp that the trigger of the open / close execution mode this time is one of the jackpot results. ..

If it is determined in step S1305 that the special deviation flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, a process of setting "1" in the round counter RC is executed. Then, in step S1309, a process of storing the special out-of-order flag in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204 is executed. The special disconnection flag is a flag for the MPU 202 to grasp that the trigger of the opening / closing execution mode this time is the special disconnection result.

After executing the process of step S1305 or step S1309, the opening command is set in step S1310. This set opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. This opening command includes information on the type of game result that triggered the open / close execution mode. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The content of this effect includes a display mode in the symbol display device 42, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 42 so that the display (for example, moving image display) corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode is performed based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82.

In the following step S1311, after executing the external signal setting process, the game state transition process ends. In the external signal setting process, it is determined whether or not any of the first V flag, the second V flag, and the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204, and if any of the flags is stored, the external terminal board is stored. The signal output state of the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided in 79 is defined as the jackpot signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 generates a jackpot in the management control device. You can grasp what you have done.

Further, in the external signal setting process, when the special deviation flag is stored in the RAM 204, the signal output state of the output terminal for the special deviation signal provided on the external terminal plate 79 is set to the special deviation signal output state. .. As a result, when the output terminal for the special disconnection signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the special disconnection signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the management control device. It is possible to grasp that the execution mode has occurred.

If it is determined in step S1301 that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1312. In step S1312, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the large winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S1313. Here, the large winning opening opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28.

First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening 321 or the distribution entrance 351 is being opened. Specifically, such a determination is made based on the driving state of the driving unit 323 of the first variable winning device 32A and the driving unit 353 of the second variable winning device 32B. When the large winning opening 321 and the distribution entrance 351 are not open, it is determined in step S1402 whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0", and it is provided in various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 in step S1403. It is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC is "0".

If the value of the round counter RC is "0" or the value of the timer counter TC is not "0", the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter RC is not "0" and the value of the timer counter TC is "0", the process proceeds to step S1404, and any V flag (first V flag or second V flag) is set in the RAM 204. Determines if is stored. That is, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is either the 1V and jackpot result or the 2V and jackpot result.

If any of the V flags is stored, the process proceeds to step S1405, and whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "1" and the round to be started from now on is the final round of the opening / closing execution mode this time is determined. judge. If it is not the final round, or if none of the V flags are stored in step S1404, the first release process is executed in step S1406. In the first opening process, the drive unit 323 of the first variable winning device 32A is driven and controlled to open the large winning opening 321. As a result, winning the first variable winning device 32A is allowed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1405 that it is the final round of the opening / closing execution mode this time, the second opening process is executed in step S1407. In the second opening process, the driving unit 353 of the second variable winning device 32B is driven and controlled to open the distribution inlet 351. As a result, winning the second variable winning device 32B is permitted.

After executing the process of step S1406 or step S1407, it is determined in step S1408 whether or not the jackpot hit flag is stored in the RAM 204. That is, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is one of the big hit results. If the open / close execution mode is triggered by any of the jackpot results, "15000" is set in the timer counter TC in step S1409. This process is a process for determining a period for holding the open state of the large winning opening 321 or the distribution inlet 351, and the value set in step S1409 corresponds to 30 sec (open for a long period of time). In the following step S1410, "8" is set in the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204. The winning counter PC is a counter for counting the number of winnings in the variable winning devices 32A and 32B. In step S1408, it is a process of setting the maximum number of winnings (8 pieces, the first number) in one round of the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result.

If the jackpot middle flag is not stored in step S1408 and the trigger of the opening / closing execution mode this time is a special deviation result, "3000" is set in the timer counter TC in step S1411. The value set in step S1411 corresponds to 6 sec (open for a short period of time). In the following step S1412, "3" is set in the winning counter PC. The value set in step S1412 corresponds to the maximum number of winnings (3, 2nd) in the open / close execution mode based on the special deviation result.

After executing the process of step S1410 or step S1412, the release command is set as an output target to the effect control device 82 in step S1413, and then the main prize opening opening / closing process is completed. The release command includes information on which of the variable winning devices 32A and 32B is to be in the open state. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the variable winning devices 32A and 32B to be in the open state based on the received release command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. To do.

If the large winning opening 321 or the distribution entrance 351 is open in step S1401, the process proceeds to step S1414, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC is not "0", it is determined in step S1415 whether or not any of the variable winning devices 32A and 32B has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the passage of the game ball is detected based on the detection state of the detection sensor 325 for the winning opening or the detection sensor 361 for counting. If no prize has been won, the large winning opening opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when a prize has been generated, the value of the prize counter PC is decremented by 1 in step S1416.

In the following step S1417, it is determined whether or not the game ball has flowed into the V winning area 356 based on the detection state of the V winning detection sensor 362. When the inflow to the V winning area 356 occurs, the process of storing the V winning flag in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204 is executed in step S1418. The V winning flag is a flag for the MPU 202 to grasp that a V winning (inflow of a game ball into the V winning area 356) has occurred in the opening / closing execution mode this time.

When it is determined in step S1417 that V winning has not occurred, or after the processing of step S1418 is executed, it is determined in step S1419 whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0", and "0". If not, the opening / closing process of the main prize opening is terminated as it is.

When the value of the timer counter TC is "0" in step S1414, or when the value of the winning counter PC is "0" in step S1419, it means that the big winning opening closing condition is satisfied. In such a case, in step S1420, the corresponding drive units 323 and 353 are set to the non-drive state in order to close the large winning opening 321 or the distribution inlet 351.

In the following step S1421, the value of the round counter RC is decremented by 1, and in step S1422, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0”. If the value of the round counter RC is not "0", the timer counter TC is set to "1000" (that is, 2 sec) in step S1423. After that, the closing command is set in step S1424, and the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed. This set closing command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output processing in the normal processing. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the closure of the variable winning devices 32A and 32B based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

If it is determined in step S1422 that the value of the round counter RC is "0", the ending start process is executed in step S1425. In the start process, an ending waiting time for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the open / close execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

After that, in step S1426, after setting the ending command, the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed. This set ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the end of the open / close execution mode based on the received ending command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The content of this effect includes a display mode in the symbol display device 42, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 42 so that the display (for example, moving image display) corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode is performed based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 27), after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S1313, it is determined in step S1314 whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0”. Further, in step S1315, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the value of the round counter RC is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S1316, and in step S1317. After executing the end processing of the open / close execution mode, the game state transition process is ended. In the end processing of the open / close execution mode, various flags (first winning flag and second winning flag) that triggered the open / close execution mode are erased, and the effect control device 82 so as to perform an effect for ending the open / close execution mode. Etc. are controlled.

Here, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1501, a flag erasing process for erasing information for specifying the game state is executed. Specifically, when the jackpot middle flag, the special missed middle flag, the high frequency support flag, and the high probability mode flag are stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204, they are deleted and already stored. If not, maintain that state. In the following step S1502, it is determined whether or not the second V flag is stored in the RAM 204. When the second V flag is stored, the high frequency support mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S1503. As a result, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. Further, in step S1503, a high-frequency support command is output to the effect control device 82. As a result, the effect control device 82 can grasp that the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S1502, or after the process of step S1503 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1504. In step S1504, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored. When the V winning flag is stored, the process of storing the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204 is executed in step S1505. As a result, the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode. Further, in step S1505, a high-probability command is output to the effect control device 82. As a result, the effect control device 82 can grasp that the winning / losing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode.

The effect control device 82 can grasp that the game state shifts to the second probability change state by receiving the above-mentioned high-frequency support command and the high-probability command at the end of the open / close execution mode. Further, by receiving the high-frequency support command and not receiving the high-probability command, it is possible to grasp that the gaming state shifts to the first probability change state. Then, by not receiving any of these high-frequency support commands and high-probability commands, it is possible to grasp that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state.

In this case, the effect control device 82 performs a process of changing the target of the variation display of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 on the display screen 42a of the symbol display device 42 according to the transition of the gaming state. That is, based on the transition of the gaming state to the normal gaming state or the second probability variation state, the target of the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen 42a is the game number on the first special figure side, which is the recommended game. Set to target the variable display of. Further, based on the transition of the game state to the first probability change state, the target of the change display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen 42a is the change display of the game times on the second special figure side, which is a recommended game. Set to target. Whether the first special figure side or the second special figure side is subjected to the variable display of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 depends on, for example, the difference in the background, the type of the variable character, the sound effect, the light emitting mode, and the like. Can be identified. In addition, although the target game times are common to the normal game state and the second probability change state on the first special figure side, the player may also use them due to differences in the background, the type of variable character, the sound effect, the light emission mode, and the like. It is identifiable. As a result, the player can grasp the difference in the advantage between the normal gaming state and the second probability variation state.

Here, even if the background, the type of the variable character, and the like as described above are changed, the variable display of each game time is individually executed in the execution display areas GA and GB. Therefore, even if the player is confused as to which game time the variable display of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 corresponds to, it is possible to confirm it by the execution display areas GA and GB. Further, when the background or the type of the variable character is changed, the target execution display areas GA and GB are highlighted, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 that have been displayed up to that point are not targeted. The effect of being sucked into the execution display areas GA and GB is performed. As a result, it is possible to easily identify which of the game times variation display is performed by the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Returning to the explanation of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, if a negative determination is made in step S1504, or after the process of step S1505 is executed, each game result flag (first winning flag, second winning flag, second) is performed in step S1506. After executing the erasing process of the winning flag, the 1st V flag, the 2nd V flag, the normal flag, the special off flag, and other flags for game rounds, as well as the V winning flag used during the open / close execution mode, this transition is made. End the process.

The second probability variation state (high-frequency support mode and high-probability mode) is set by performing the processes of steps S1503 and S1505, and the first process is performed by performing the process of step S1505 without performing the process of step S1503. It is set to a probabilistic state (low frequency support mode and high probability mode), and is set to a normal gaming state (low frequency support mode and low probability mode) if neither of the processes of step S1503 and step S1505 is performed.

<Contents of the game>
The content of the game realized by the above configuration will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 30A, a normal gaming state, a first probability variation state, and a second probability variation state are set as the gaming states. In the normal game state, the winning / losing lottery mode is a low probability mode, and the support mode is a low frequency support mode. As described above, in the low frequency support mode, it is possible to win a prize in the lower first operating port 33A and the second operating port 34. However, the variable display time is more likely to be set in the lower first operating port 33A than in the second operating port 34. In other words, when the second operating port 34 is awarded, the denominator of the winning probability is substantially set. A variable display time is set to such an extent that it is difficult to receive a corresponding number of lottery. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the lower first operating port 33A has better digestion efficiency than the second operating port 34, and it is preferable to play the game aiming at the left side region PE2 in the first firing operation.

Based on the winning of the lower 1st operating port 33A, the winning / failing lottery on the 1st special drawing side is performed, and if the winning / failing result is the big hit result, it is divided into either the big hit result without V or the big hit result with 1V. Be done. If it is a big hit result without V, it is set to the normal game state after the open / close execution mode, and the game state is not changed. On the other hand, if the result is a big hit with the first V, the support mode remains the low frequency support mode, but the second variable winning device 32B is allowed to win in the open / close execution mode, so that a V winning occurs. obtain. When the V prize is generated, the winning / losing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode. In this case, since the support mode remains in the low-frequency support mode as described above, it is possible to win a prize in either the lower first operating port 33A or the second operating port 34 as compared with the normal gaming state. There is no change in being in a state. However, when the high probability mode is set, the reference variable display time table is switched, and the second operating port 34 is more likely to set a shorter time than the lower first operating port 33A. As a result, if the game is played aiming at the second operating port 34 so as to allow the right side region PE3 to flow down in the second firing operation, it becomes possible to frequently receive the winning / failing lottery on the second special drawing side.

Not only that, in the winning / failing lottery on the second special drawing side based on the winning of the second operating port 34, the probability of a special loss result is set higher than in the winning / failing lottery on the first special drawing side. In the case of a special off result, although a prize ball cannot be obtained from the jackpot result, a predetermined number (3 pieces) of prizes can be expected to the first variable winning device 32A, and a prize ball (30 pieces) can be obtained accordingly. .. As a result, in the first probabilistic state, by aiming at the second operating port 34, it is possible to play the game without significantly reducing the number of balls held.

When a big hit result is obtained in the winning or losing lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 34, the distribution table on the second special drawing side is referred to, and the result is sorted into the 1V with big hit result or the 2nd V with big hit result. If the result is assigned to the jackpot result with the first V, the game aiming at the second operating port 34 should be continued as described above. On the other hand, when the second V is distributed to the jackpot result, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. When set to the high frequency support mode, it becomes easier to win a prize in the right first operating port 33B, and if the second launch operation is performed so as to flow down the right region PE3, the first special drawing side without reducing the number of balls held too much. It is possible to play a game to get a lottery. Then, as with the first V presence jackpot result, the V prize is likely to occur during the opening / closing execution mode, so that the winning / losing lottery mode is likely to be set to the high probability mode.

As described above, in the normal game state, the first probability change state and the second probability change state are triggered by the result of the big hit with the first V (in short, the state in which it is easy to shift to the open / close execution mode). ) Can be obtained (FIG. 30 (b)). In other words, since the configuration is such that the jackpot result without V cannot be distributed to the jackpot result without V in the first probability variation state, and the jackpot result without V is distributed only in the second probability variation state, the first probability variation state does not go through the second probability variation state. There is no transition to the normal game state. Not only that, in the first probability change state, it is possible to obtain two more probability change states by obtaining a jackpot result with the first V. Even in the second probability change state, it is possible to obtain two more probability change states by obtaining a jackpot result with the first V. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot result with the first V in the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

<Payout base>
The first probability variation state and the second probability variation state have the same payout base (ratio of the number of launch balls to the number of prize balls) obtained by subtracting the number of prize balls that will be obtained from the number of launch balls in the recommended game mode. It is set to be almost the same. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), in the first probability variation state, when the game is played aiming at the second operating port 34, the prize ball based on the winning of the second operating port 34 is 1. Since the number is the same, the number of balls held does not increase based on the winning of the second operating port 34 (in FIG. 31A, the increase of the winning balls based on the winning of the second operating port 34 is omitted. Shown). On the other hand, in the winning / failing lottery on the second special drawing side, which is performed based on the winning of the second operating port 34, if a special result is obtained, the winning of the first variable winning device 32A is permitted, and the prize ball based on the result. Can be obtained.

That is, when the game ball is launched toward the second operating port 34 in the first probability variation state, about half (specifically, about 45%) enters the second operating port 34. Therefore, when 100 game balls are fired, about 45 of them win a prize in the second operating port 34, and about 45 prize balls (45 prizes x 1 prize ball) can be obtained. Then, in the winning / failing lottery on the second special drawing side, there is a 1/30 probability that the result will be a special loss, and about 30 prize balls (3 prizes x 10 prize balls) can be obtained. Therefore, when 100 game balls are fired, it can be expected that about 45 prize balls will be obtained. In addition, a part of the game balls that did not enter the second operating port 34 wins the lower first operating port 33A or the general winning opening 31, and 100 prize balls obtained thereby are fired (second). If 55 balls that did not enter the operating port 34 flow down downstream from that, the number will be about 5. As a result, when the game balls are fired toward the second operating port 34 in the first probability variation state (the second firing operation is performed), about 95 prize balls can be obtained when 100 balls are fired. The payout base, which is the ratio between the number of shots and the number of prize balls, is about 95%.

In addition, when the prize balls obtained when a big hit result is obtained in the winning / losing lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 34 and the lower first operating port 33A, the ratio between the number of shots and the number of prize balls is 100%. Exceed. Therefore, in the first probabilistic state, the player can increase the number of balls held by playing the game aiming at the second operating port 34.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31B, in the second probability change state, when the game is played aiming at the right first operating port 33B, a special deviation result is obtained unlike the first probability change state. The probability is low (in FIG. 31 (b), the special deviation result is omitted). On the other hand, in the second probability change state, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode, and since there are three prize balls based on the winning of the right first operating port 33B, it is based on the winning of the right first operating port 33B. It is possible to increase (avoid a decrease) the number of balls held.

That is, in the second probability variation state, when the game ball is launched aiming at the right first operating port 33B, about 18% wins the right first operating port 33B. Therefore, when 100 game balls are fired, about 18 of them win a prize in the right first operating port 33B, and about 54 prize balls (18 prizes x 3 prize balls) can be obtained. Further, when the game ball is launched aiming at the right first operating port 33B, the game ball that did not enter the right first operating port 33B can enter the second operating port 34. Therefore, when 100 game balls are fired, about 37 game balls, which is about 45% of the about 82 game balls that did not win the right first operation port 33B, go to the second operation port 34. About 37 prize balls (37 prizes x 1 prize ball) can be obtained by entering the ball. Then, about 45 game balls flowed down so that the game balls that did not enter the right first operating port 33B or the second operating port 34 won the lower first operating port 33A or the general winning opening 31. Assuming that, about 4 prize balls can be added. As a result, when the game balls are fired toward the right first operating port 33B in the second probability variation state (the second firing operation is performed), about 95 prize balls can be obtained when 100 balls are fired. The payout base, which is the ratio between the number of shots and the number of prize balls, is about 95%, which is the same as or substantially the same as when the second firing operation is performed in the first probability variation state.

In addition, when the prize balls obtained when a big hit result is obtained in the winning / losing lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 34 and the lower first operating port 33A, the ratio between the number of shots and the number of prize balls is 100%. Exceed. Therefore, even in the second probability change state, the player can increase the number of balls held by playing the game aiming at the right first operating port 33B.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The lower first operating port 33A and the second operating port 34, which can be entered in the normal game state, have the same probability of winning a big hit, but based on the winning of the second operating port 34 as a distribution table. The distribution table for the second special figure referred to in the above is set to be more advantageous. However, the set fluctuation display time differs between the lower first operating port 33A and the second operating port 34, and the lower first operating port 33A fluctuates so as to have better digestion efficiency than the second operating port 34. The display time is set. In this way, it becomes possible for the player to select a game such as whether to aim at the advantageous side or prioritize the digestion efficiency, and it is possible to diversify the game.

The lower first actuating port 33A and the second actuating port 34 are arranged at positions where the ball cannot enter by the same firing operation. As a result, it is possible to clearly distinguish which operating ports 33A and 34 are aimed at in the normal gaming state, and it is possible to make a difference in game playability.

When the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the first probabilistic gaming state, it becomes easier to set a shorter variable display time for winning the second operating port 34 than for winning the lower first operating port 33A. That is, it is reversed from the above-mentioned normal gaming state from the viewpoint of digestion efficiency. In this way, the operating ports 33A and 34 to be aimed at can be changed by shifting the game state, and the game can be diversified.

The above-mentioned changes in the gaming state (changes in digestion efficiency) are made based on the jackpot results. For example, if the game state changes without going through the jackpot result, it becomes difficult for the player to know which of the operating ports 33A and 34 should be aimed at. Therefore, by using the jackpot result as an opportunity, it is possible to realize various playability and make it easy for the player to understand (so as not to cause confusion).

When the result of the big hit is obtained, the opening / closing execution mode is set to be executed, and the opening / closing execution mode is executed by the variable winning devices 32A and 32B provided in the right area PE3. The variable winning devices 32A and 32B are arranged at positions where the game ball cannot reach even if the game is performed by the first firing operation aiming at the left side region PE2. That is, as a player who has aimed at the lower first operating port 33A in the first firing operation in the normal game state, the mode of the firing operation is set to aim at the variable winning devices 32A and 32B in the wake of the opening / closing execution mode. Switch to launch operation. Then, as described above, the second operating port 34 is arranged at a position reached by the second firing operation. In this way, it is possible to inevitably switch to the mode of the firing operation corresponding to the second operating port 34 to be aimed after, triggered by the opening / closing execution mode.

As a game result, in addition to the jackpot result, a special off result that allows the first variable winning device 32A to win a prize is provided. Then, based on the special deviation result, the above-mentioned transition of the gaming state (change in digestion efficiency) was prevented from occurring. As a result, it is possible to realize a game in which a prize ball is obtained by using a special deviation result without changing the game state, and it is possible to further diversify the game.

In the first probability change state and the second probability change state, even if the launch mode is the same, the balls are entered into different operating ports 33B and 34 so that the jackpot probability is the same and the payout base associated therewith is the same. I set it. By doing so, it is possible to realize a game in which the first probabilistic state and the second probabilistic state go back and forth while preventing dissatisfaction such as the number of game balls decreasing faster in one of the game states. Will be.

Then, such a game of going back and forth between the first probability change state and the second probability change state is suitable by performing the game of the second launch mode (right-handed) as the game recommended in the first probability change state and the second probability change state. It has a configuration that can be realized. In other words, if a game that is not recommended is performed, for example, if the first launch mode (left-handed) is performed in the first probability variation state, the payout base will be lower than in the second launch mode, and the number of game balls will decrease faster. In addition, by receiving the winning / failing lottery on the first special drawing side, there is a possibility that even if the jackpot result is obtained, it will be distributed to the jackpot result without V. In this case, despite the transition from the normal gaming state to the first probability change state, the normal gaming state is restored with two jackpots including the jackpot at the time of transition. Further, if the first launch mode (left-handed) is performed in the second probability variation state, the distribution is the same as in the case where the second launch mode is performed, but the payout base is higher than that in the second launch mode. Can also be lowered, and the number of balls held can be greatly reduced. In this way, by making it more advantageous for the player to play the game recommended in the first probability change state and the second probability change state, the game that goes back and forth between the first probability change state and the second probability change state is preferably performed. It will be possible to realize it.

An electric accessory 331 is provided in the right first operating port 33B, and the ball entry rate into the right first operating port 33B is increased by setting the high frequency support mode. On the other hand, in the second operating port 34, the probability of a special disconnection result is set higher than that of the right first operating port 33B side (first special drawing side), and is set based on the winning of the second operating port 34. The variable display time to be displayed is different between the high probability mode and the low probability mode (the high probability mode selects a shorter time than the low probability mode). That is, in each of the operating ports 33B and 34, the payout base is changed based on the change in the gaming state (transition of the support mode or the winning / losing lottery mode). By doing so, it is possible to realize game playability in which the payout bases at the different operating ports 33B and 34 are the same while shifting the game state.

The right first operating port 33B is provided on the upstream side of the second operating port 34. As a result, it is possible to avoid an event in which the ball enters the second operating port 34 side even though the high frequency support mode is set, and the payout base is not set as set.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the lottery system on the first special drawing side and the lottery system on the second special drawing side are performed in parallel, and the lottery timings of the lottery systems overlap. Change the processing when doing so.

That is, in the first embodiment, the first game time control process is executed before the second game time control process in the normal process. Therefore, even if the lottery timings of the lottery systems overlap, for example, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the first game round control process is performed first, and then the second game round control process is performed. It was configured to be done. That is, when the lottery timings overlap and all of the pending information drawn at the overlapping timings correspond to the jackpot result, the lottery system on the first special figure side has priority (first winning). The flag is stored), and the execution of the lottery on the second special drawing side is restricted in the subsequent second game round control process.

First, the normal processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The difference in the first embodiment is that the game times control process is integrated into one process in the normal process. That is, after performing the processes of steps S1601 to S1602 in the same manner as the processes of steps S301 to S302, the game times control corresponding to the first game times control process of step S303 and the second game times control process of step S304. The process is executed in step S1603. The processing of steps S1604 to S1609 is the same as the processing of steps S305 to S310.

Prior to the game turn control process in step S1603, the forced end process and the end process of the open / close execution mode in the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 33, in the forced termination process in the present embodiment, the same processes as those in steps S801 and S803 are executed in steps S1701 and S1702. In step S1703, a process of memorizing the forced termination is performed. That is, the forced termination flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. After that, the forced termination process is terminated.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 34, in the end processing of the open / close execution mode in the present embodiment, it is determined in step S1801 whether or not the forced end flag is stored. If the forced termination flag is not stored, the deletion processing of various flags is executed in step S1802, and then the termination processing of the main open / close execution mode is terminated. On the other hand, when the forced termination flag is stored, the forced termination flag and various flags other than the first winning flag or the second winning flag are deleted, and then the closing process of the main open / close execution mode is performed. finish.

The game turn control process in step S1603 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the forced termination flag is stored. If the forced termination flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1902, and it is determined whether or not the second winning flag is stored. When the affirmative judgment is made in step S1901 and step S1902, a big hit occurs on the second special figure side during the game round on the first special figure side, and the game on the first special figure side during the execution. This is the case when the times are forcibly terminated. In this case, first, each winning flag (first winning flag or second winning flag) and forced termination flag are erased in step S1903, then the first game round control process is executed in step S1904, followed by a step. The second game time control process is executed in S1905. Further, when the forced termination flag is stored in step S1901 and the second winning flag is not stored in step S1902 (when the first winning flag is stored), the step. After deleting each winning flag (first winning flag or second winning flag) and forced termination flag in S1906, the second game round control process is executed in step S1907, and the first game is followed by step S1908. Execute the control process.

If the forced termination flag is not stored in step S1901, the process proceeds to step S1904, the first game round control process is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and then step S1905. The second game time control process is executed.

After executing the process of step S1905 or step S1908, the game times control process is terminated.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the forced termination of the game times occurs, the lottery system on the side of the forced termination is preferentially executed at the start timing of the game times after the open / close execution mode. Specifically, when the first special drawing side is forcibly terminated, the lottery system on the first special drawing side is prioritized and executed (the first game times control process is prior to the second game times control process). When the second special figure side is forcibly terminated, the lottery system on the second special figure side is preferentially executed (the second game times control process is executed before the first game times control process). Executed in).

By doing so, it is possible to more reliably guarantee the two probable change states. That is, if a big hit occurs in the lottery system on the first special figure side while the variation display on the second special figure side is being executed in the normal game state, the variation display on the second special figure side is forcibly terminated. As described above, when the jackpot result is obtained in the normal game state and the result is distributed to the jackpot result with the first V, the game shifts to the first probability variation state and the lottery on the second special figure side is performed (entering the second operating port 34). Move to the game to let). However, in the first lottery in the first probability variation state started in such a situation, when a big hit occurs in the lottery system on the first special figure side, that is, the lottery system on the first special figure side is two consecutive times. In the case of a big hit, in the first embodiment, since the first game round control process is prioritized, the lottery on the second special figure side cannot be received and the distribution on the first special figure side is performed. There is a possibility that it will be distributed to the jackpot result without V depending on the table. That is, in the first embodiment, if the jackpot results occur two times in a row in the lottery system on the first special drawing side, there is a possibility that the game shifts to the normal gaming state without going through the second probability variation state.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to more reliably shift to the normal gaming state after passing through the second probability variation state, that is, through the lottery on the second special drawing side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably carry out the two probable change states.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the winning rate between the first operating ports 33A and 33B and the second operating port 34 in the normal gaming state and the long-short relationship at the time of variable display in the first and second embodiments are used. , Achieve different playability. That is, in the first and second embodiments, the game ball is more likely to win a prize in the second operating port 34 than in the first operating ports 33A and 33B during the normal gaming state, and the first operating ports 33A and 33B are reached. Fluctuation display time on the first special drawing side based on the winning of (FIGS. 12 (a), 12 (b)), rather than the variation display time on the second special drawing side based on the winning of the second operating port 34 (FIG. 12) (C) and FIG. 12 (d)) have a configuration in which a longer time is easier to select. Then, the variable display time on the second special figure side is set to a length (6000 sec when the game is off) that makes it difficult to realize a smooth game without substantially completing the game round, so that the second special figure side is in the normal game state. 2 We have realized a game in which the operating port on the first special drawing side (particularly the lower first operating port 33A) is aimed at without aiming at the second operating port 34 on the special drawing side. In other words, aiming at the operating port on the side where it is difficult to win and the variable display time is short is greater for the player than aiming at the operating port on the side where it is easy to win and the variable display time is long, and the player wins the prize. The configuration is such that it is difficult to aim at the operating port on the side where the fluctuation display time is short. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the player is provided with a merit by aiming at the operating port on the side where it is easy to win a prize and the variable display time is long.

FIG. 36 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 24 in this embodiment. In FIG. 36, the same configurations as those of the game board 24 in the first and second embodiments are shown with basically the same reference numerals, and the description of the same configurations will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the third actuating port 51 as the actuating port on the first special drawing side and the fourth actuating port 52 as the actuating port on the second special figure side are unitized as an actuating port device and are used as a game board. It is installed in the lower region PE4 of 24. That is, when the launch operation device 28 is operated by the first launch operation so that the game ball flows down the right side region PE3 to the third operation port 51 and the fourth operation port 52, and so as to flow down the left side region PE2. When the launch operation device 28 is operated in the second launch operation, the game ball can be reached in any case.

Both the third actuating port 51 and the fourth actuating port 52 are open upward. Further, both operating ports 51 and 52 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the third operating port 51 faces upward. The fourth operating port 52 is provided with an electric accessory 52a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 52a will be described. The electric accessory 52a is in a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) in which it is difficult for the game ball to win in the fourth operating port 52, and an open state (supported state or guided state) in which the game ball is easier to win than in the closed state. Can be switched to.

The operating port case constituting the third operating port 51 projects toward the front side and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and the upper side length <lower side length. At this time, the upper side length of the operating port case (that is, the left-right width of the third operating port 51) is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the lower side length is when the electric accessory 52a is in the closed state. The length is larger than the distance between the left and right electric accessories 52a. Further, when the electric accessory 52a is in the closed state, the distance between the operating port case and the upper end of the electric accessory 52a is set so that the distance between the operating ports 51 and 52 is slightly shorter than the diameter of the game ball. It has been adjusted.

According to the above configuration, the game ball cannot win the fourth operating port 52 in the closed state of the electric accessory 52a, and the fourth operating port 52 can be won by opening the electric accessory 52a. In particular, at this time, during the operation in which the electric accessory 52a shifts from the closed state to the open state, the operating port case of the third operating port 51 has a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above, which becomes an obstacle. Until the accessory 52a is sufficiently opened, it is impossible to win a prize for the game ball in the fourth operating port 52, and the prize can be won only when the electric accessory 52a is almost fully opened. That is, the game ball that has fallen from above hits the side surface of the operating port case and is repelled to the outside, and does not directly win the fourth operating port 52. As a result, when the electric accessory 52a is opened in a very short time, it becomes extremely difficult to win a prize in the fourth operating port 52, and only when the electric accessory 52a is continuously opened, the fourth operating port 52 It will be easier to win a prize.

In addition to the configuration in which the operating port case of the third operating port 51 has a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above, the operating port case of the third operating port 51 may have a two-stage configuration with a narrow upper part and a wide lower part, or a third. A substantially C-shaped guide piece may be provided on both the left and right sides of the operating port 51, or an obstacle nail may be planted diagonally below the operating port case.

In the lower region PE4, a third variable winning device 55 is provided on the downstream side of the third operating port 51 and the fourth operating port 52. The third variable winning device 55 has the same configuration as the first variable winning device 32A. That is, it is provided with a large winning opening 55a leading to the back side of the game board 24, and is provided with an opening / closing door 55b for opening and closing the large winning opening 55a. The opening / closing door 55b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and a predetermined opening / closing door 55b is likely to win the game ball when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode (opening / closing execution state) is won in the internal lottery. It can be switched to the open state. A variable winning drive unit 55c is connected to the main control device 81, and the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 controls the variable winning drive unit 55c to control switching between the open state and the closed state of the opening / closing door 55b. Will be done. Further, the game ball entered from the large winning opening 55a is detected by the detection sensor (not shown) for the large winning opening. The MPU 202 of the main control device 81 grasps that the game ball has entered the large winning opening 55a based on the detection result of the detection sensor (not shown).

In this embodiment, it corresponds to the second variable winning device 32B having a V winning area 356 for executing a predetermined round in the opening / closing execution mode and setting the height of the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode. There is no winning device. Therefore, in the present embodiment, all the rounds in the open / close execution mode are executed by the third variable winning device 55, and the high and low of the winning / failing lottery mode after the open / close execution mode triggers the transition of the open / close execution mode. The configuration is set based on the game result.

Here, the configuration of the winning / failing lottery in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.

In the present embodiment, two types of pass / fail tables are set as the pass / fail table: a pass / fail table in the low probability mode (FIG. 37 (a)) and a pass / fail table in the high probability mode (FIG. 37 (b)). ing. Then, on both the first special drawing side and the second special drawing side, the winning / failing lottery is executed using the winning / failing table according to the height of the winning / failing lottery mode. That is, in the present embodiment, a separate pass / fail table is not prepared for the pass / fail table on the first special figure side and the pass / fail table on the second special figure side, and a common pass / fail table is used to reduce the storage capacity. Is planned.

As the distribution table, as shown in FIG. 38, the distribution table for the first special figure (FIG. 38 (a)) and the distribution table for the second special figure (FIG. 38 (b)) Two types are set.

In the distribution table for the first special figure, the first normal jackpot result and the probability variation jackpot result are set as the distribution destinations of the game results. Further, in the distribution table for the second special figure, the second normal jackpot result and the probability variation jackpot result are set as the distribution destinations of the game results.

For the first normal jackpot result and the second normal jackpot result, 15 rounds of open / close execution mode are performed, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the winning / failing lottery mode becomes a low probability mode, and the support mode becomes a high frequency support mode. It is a big hit result. However, this high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of game times reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the transition.

The difference between the first normal jackpot result and the second normal jackpot result will be described in detail later, but there is a difference in the variable display time table in the advanced support mode.

The probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode is performed for 15 rounds, and after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit.

Similar to the first and second embodiments, this embodiment also has a configuration in which the game times on the first special figure side and the game times on the second special figure side are carried out in parallel. Therefore, the configurations of the first game round control process (FIG. 18) and the second game round control process (FIG. 23) in the normal process are substantially the same as those of the first and second embodiments. However, as described above, since there is a difference in the distribution destination of the game result and the setting of the high and low of the winning / losing lottery mode, the changes in the processing related to the difference will be described below.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the first fluctuation start processing in the present embodiment. The first variation start process is a process executed in step S406 in the first game turn control process, and is carried out when starting the game turn on the first special figure side.

In the present embodiment, similarly to steps S601 to S604, in steps S2001 to S2004, a winning / failing table according to the height of the winning / failing lottery mode is acquired, and each process for winning / failing lottery is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, either the hit / fail table in the low probability mode of FIG. 37 (a) or the hit / miss table in the high probability mode of FIG. 37 (b) is selected and the pass / fail determination process is performed. Is done.

In step S2005, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination process is a jackpot winning, and if it is a jackpot winning, the first winning flag is stored in step S2006. These processes are the same as the processes of steps S605 and S606.

In step S2007, the distribution determination process is executed. In such a process, the distribution table for the first special figure of FIG. 38 (a) is used to determine the type of the jackpot result this time. In step S2008, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot result is a probabilistic jackpot result based on the processing result of step S2007. If it is a probability variation jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S2009, and the variation of the first special figure display unit 37a in a state where the stop result at which the probability variation jackpot result is generated is displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a. Executes the stop result setting process for the probability change jackpot to end the display. Then, in step S2010, the probability variation flag, which is information for indicating that the current game result is the probability variation jackpot result, is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204.

When a negative determination is made in step S2008, it means that the current jackpot result is the first normal jackpot result. In this case, in order to end the variable display of the first special figure display unit 37a in the state where the stop result at which the first normal jackpot result is generated is displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a in step S2011. Executes the stop result setting process for the first normal jackpot. Then, in step S2012, the first normal flag, which is information for indicating that the current game result is the first normal jackpot result, is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204.

If it is determined in step S2005 that the result is not a jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S2013 to determine whether or not the current deviation result is a special deviation result. If it is a special deviation result, the process proceeds to step S2014 to execute the stop result setting process for the special deviation. Further, in step S2015, the special off flag is stored. If it is determined in step S2013 that the result is not a special deviation result, the stop result setting process for normal deviation is executed in step S2016. The processing of steps S2013 to S2016 is the same as the processing of steps S613 to S616.

After executing any of the processes of step S2010, step S2012, step S2015, and step S2016, the variation display time setting process is executed in step S2017, and the variation display is started in step S2018. 1 End the fluctuation start processing. The process of setting the variable display time in step S2017 will be described in detail later.

Next, the second fluctuation start processing on the second special drawing side will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40. The second variation start process is a process performed in step S906 in the second game round control process.

The second fluctuation start processing is substantially the same as the first fluctuation start processing, as described in the first and second embodiments. That is, in steps S2101 to S2104, the same winning / failing lottery process as in steps S2001 to S2004 is performed. Then, in step S2105, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won, and if the jackpot is won, the process of storing the second winning flag is executed in step S2106.

After that, the distribution determination process is performed in step S2107. In such a process, the type of the jackpot result of this time is determined with reference to the distribution table for the second special figure of FIG. 38 (b). In step S2108, it is determined whether or not the type of the jackpot result this time is a probability variation jackpot result, and if it is a probability variation jackpot result, a stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot is executed in step S2109. Then, in step S2110, the process of storing the probability change flag is executed.

Further, if it is not a probabilistic jackpot result, it means that the current jackpot result is the second normal jackpot result. In this case, in step S2111, the stop result at which the second normal jackpot result is generated. Is displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a, and the stop result setting process for the second normal jackpot is executed to end the variable display of the first special figure display unit 37a. Then, in step S2112, the second normal flag, which is information for indicating that the current game result is the second normal jackpot result, is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204.

If a negative determination is made in step S2105, the processing for the disengagement result is executed in steps S2113 to S2116 in the same manner as in steps S2013 to 2016.

After executing any of the processes of step S2110, step S2112, step S2115 and step S2116, the variation display time setting process is executed in step S2117, and the variation display is started in step S2118. 2 End the fluctuation start processing. The variable display time setting process in step S2117 is the same process as in step S2017, and will be described in detail later.

Next, the game state transition process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2201, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S2202, and it is determined whether or not the winning flag of any of the first winning flag and the second winning flag or the special loss flag is stored in the RAM 204. If neither flag is stored, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If any of the flags is stored, the process proceeds to step S2203, and it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation display of the corresponding game times. The processing of steps S2201 to S2203 is the same as the processing of steps S1301 to S1303.

In the following step S2204, the start processing of the open / close execution mode is executed, and in steps S2205 to S2207, the processing for setting the number of rounds is executed. These processes are the same as the processes of step S1305, step S1306, and step S1308. In this embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode based on the special deviation result is the same one-round opening / closing execution mode as in the first and second embodiments, while the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result is the first and first. The opening / closing execution mode is set to 15 rounds, which is more than that of the second embodiment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a negative determination is made in step S2205 and the open / close execution mode is based on the jackpot result, "15" is set in the round counter RC in step S2206.

After executing the process of setting the number of rounds in the round counter RC in step S2206 or step S2207, the process of setting the opening command is executed in step S2208, and the external signal setting process is executed in step S2209. After that, the game state transition process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, the processing for storing whether or not the opening / closing execution mode of this time in step S1307 and step S1309 is based on the jackpot result is not performed. In this embodiment, although there is a difference in the number of rounds between the open / close execution mode based on the jackpot result and the open / close execution mode based on the special miss result, the maximum number of winnings in each round is the same and the maximum number is the same. It is based on the change that the opening period will be the same length.

If it is determined in step S2201 that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S2110 to determine whether or not the opening period has ended. When it is completed, the large winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S2211.

In the large winning opening opening / closing process in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, whether or not the large winning opening 55a is opened in step S2301 is determined by the driving state of the variable winning drive unit 55c of the third variable winning device 55. Judgment from. When the large winning opening 55a is closed, it is determined in step S2302 whether or not the round counter RC is "0", and whether or not the timer counter TC is "0" in step S2303. Is determined. If the round counter RC is "0" or the timer counter TC is not "0", the large winning opening opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

When the round counter RC is not "0" and the timer counter TC is "0", the large winning opening opening process is executed in step S2304. In such a process, the variable winning drive unit 55c is driven and controlled so that the large winning opening 55a is opened. Then, in step S2305, "15000" is input to the timer counter TC to set the maximum opening period, and in step S2306, "10" is input to the winning counter PC to set the maximum number of winnings. .. Then, in step S2307, the opening command is set, and the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed.

If it is determined in step S2301 that the large winning opening 55a is in the open state, the process proceeds to step S2308. In step S2308, it is determined whether or not the timer counter TC is “0”. If the timer counter TC is not "0", it is determined in step S2309 whether or not a game ball has been won in the large winning opening 55a. When a prize is generated, the prize counter PC is updated in step S2310, and it is determined in step S2311 whether or not the maximum number of prizes has been reached (whether or not the prize counter PC = 0). Do. If no prize has been generated in step S2309, or if the maximum number of prizes has not been reached in step S2311, the main prize opening opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

If the timer counter TC is "0" in step S2308 and the maximum opening period has elapsed, or if the maximum number of winnings has been won in step S2311, the large winning opening closing process is executed in step S2312. In such a process, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 55c is terminated, and the large winning opening 55a is closed. After that, in step S2313, the update process of the round counter RC is executed, and in step S2314, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC has become "0". If the round counter RC is not "0", in step S2315, "1000" is input to the timer counter TC to set the waiting period between rounds. After that, the closing command is set in step S2316, and the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed.

If the round counter RC is "0" in step S2314, the ending start process is executed in step S2317, the ending command is set in step S2318, and then the main prize opening opening / closing process is completed. ..

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 41), after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S2211, it is determined in step S2212 whether or not the round counter RC is “0”. When the round counter RC is "0", step S2213 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the ending period, and step S2214 executes the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, as shown in FIG. 43, it is determined in step S2401 whether or not the probability change flag is stored. When the probability change flag is stored, the flag erasing process for erasing the information for specifying the game state is executed in step S2402. Specifically, if the open / close execution mode flag, the high probability mode flag, the first high frequency support flag, or the second high frequency support flag is stored, they are deleted, and if they are not stored, they are deleted. Maintain that state.

Here, in the present embodiment, the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode are set as the high-frequency support modes. The first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode differ in the variation display time of the game times on the special drawing side, which is executed during each support mode. On the other hand, in both the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 52a is opened more frequently and the open state is maintained for a longer period than in the low-frequency support mode. The frequency of the open state and the period during which the open state is maintained are the same in the first high frequency support mode and the second low frequency support mode. That is, the first high-frequency support mode and the second low-frequency support mode are treated as the same high-frequency support mode in the electric service support process (step S306 in FIG. 17), and the first high-frequency support mode and the second low-frequency support mode The only difference from the high-frequency support mode is the variable display time of the game times for special drawings. This difference in variable display time will be described in detail later.

Then, when the high-frequency support mode is set, the first high-frequency support mode flag and the second high-frequency support mode are used so that the MPU 202 identifies either the first high-frequency support mode or the second high-frequency support mode. Flags are provided, and in step S2402, a process of erasing including these support mode flags is executed.

After executing the erasing process in step S2402, the high probability mode flag is stored in the following step S2403. Then, in step S2404, the second high frequency support flag is stored. As a result, the game state is changed to the game state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the second high frequency support mode of the high frequency support modes (hereinafter, the game state is also referred to as a probability change state). Transition. After executing the process of step S2404, the main migration process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2401 that the probability variation flag is not stored, it is determined in step S2405 whether or not the first normal flag is stored. When the first normal flag is stored, the flag erasing process is executed in step S2406. After that, in step S2407, the first high frequency support flag is stored. Then, in step S2408, a process of inputting "100" to the high frequency counters provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 is executed. The high-frequency number counter is a counter for grasping the number of game times in the high-frequency support mode with a limited number of times. By the processing of steps S2406 to S2408, the game state is the first high-frequency support mode among the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-probability mode, and the first high-frequency support mode. Shifts to a gaming state in which the number of continuations of is 100 (hereinafter, the gaming state is also referred to as a first high frequency state). The first high-frequency state ends when the game times on the special figure side continue 100 times, and then shifts to the normal game state in which the winning / losing lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. After executing the process of step S2408, the main migration process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2405 that the first normal flag is not stored, it is determined in step S2409 whether or not the second normal flag is stored. When the second normal flag is stored, the flag erasing process is executed in step S2410. After that, in step S2411, the second high-frequency support flag is stored, and in step S2412, a process of inputting "100" to the high-frequency frequency counter is executed. As a result, the game state is that the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the second high frequency support mode of the high frequency support modes, and the number of continuations of the second high frequency support mode is 100 times. The game state (hereinafter, the game state is also referred to as the second high frequency state) is shifted to. The second high-frequency state ends when the game times on the special figure side continue 100 times, and then shifts to the normal game state in which the winning / losing lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. After executing the process of step S2412, the main migration process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2409 that the second normal flag is not stored, the main migration process is terminated as it is. That is, when a special deviation result occurs and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the game state of the game times resulting in the special deviation result is maintained after the end of the open / close execution mode.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 41), after the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode in step S2214 is completed, the game state transition is performed after the end process of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S2215. End the process. The process of step S2215 is the same as the process of step S1317.

Next, the variable end processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The variable end processing is a process executed in step S413 in the first game round control process and step S913 in the second game round control process, and when the game round is terminated based on the passage of the variable display time. This is the process to be performed. As already explained, if one of the game times on the 1st special figure side or the game times on the 2nd special figure side wins a big hit, the other game times are forcibly terminated. In this case, The variable end process of FIG. 44 is not performed.

In the variable end processing, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored. When the high probability mode flag is stored, it means that the game state is a probabilistic state. If the high probability mode flag is not stored, it is determined in step S2502 whether or not any of the first high frequency support flag and the second high frequency support flag is stored. When any of the high frequency support flags is stored, it means that it is in the first high frequency state or the second high frequency state. In this case, in step S2503, the update process of the high frequency counter is executed. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from the high frequency counter is executed. Then, in step S2504, it is determined whether or not the high frequency frequency counter becomes 0 based on the processing result of step S2403. When the high-frequency frequency counter becomes 0, the process of clearing each high-frequency support flag is executed in step S2505. As a result, the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state of the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

In step S2506, the forced termination process of the changing game times is executed. In such a process, if the game times of the other side, not the side that ends this time, are changing, the change display time of the game times during the change is set to 0, and the stop result according to the game result is displayed and ended. Execute the process. Specifically, when the fluctuation end processing this time is the fluctuation end processing based on the lapse of the fluctuation display time of the game times on the first special figure side, the game times on the second special figure side are changing. In some cases, the process of forcibly ending the game round on the second special figure side during this fluctuation is executed. On the contrary, when the fluctuation end processing this time is the fluctuation end processing based on the lapse of the fluctuation display time of the game times on the second special figure side, the game times on the first special figure side are changing. In some cases, the process of forcibly ending the game times on the first special drawing side during this fluctuation is executed.

By the way, as already explained, in this pachinko machine 10, both special figures are configured to be displayed in a variable manner in parallel, and if one of them starts a game round that results in a big hit, the first winning flag or the first winning flag or the first. 2 The winning flag is stored and the other fluctuation is forcibly terminated. In addition, since the start of the other fluctuation is also restricted by storing the first winning flag and the second winning flag, the side that has been forcibly terminated is in the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot that triggered the termination. Waits without starting until it finishes. That is, the configuration is such that the event in which the other variable display is executed while the variable display that results in the jackpot is being executed does not occur.

Then, when the other variable display is forcibly terminated in step S2506, the other variable display is an outlier result, and when the other variable display is terminated, the variable display that is the jackpot result is displayed. It will not be forcibly terminated.

In addition, in the case of forcibly ending the other fluctuation display in step S2506, if the other fluctuation display is a special deviation result, it depends on the game result of the side that triggered the current fluctuation end processing. Therefore, it is preferable that the opening / closing execution mode is executed based on the other special deviation result. Specifically, if the game result on the side that triggered the change end processing this time is one of the jackpot results, the jackpot result will be used instead of executing the open / close execution mode based on the other special deviation result. Based on the opening / closing execution mode, if the game result on the side that triggered the current fluctuation end processing is a special deviation result, the opening / closing execution mode based on one of the special deviation results is implemented. If the game result on the side that triggered the current fluctuation end processing is a normal deviation result, the opening / closing execution mode based on the other special deviation result is executed. By doing so, it is possible to avoid an event in which the opening / closing execution modes are duplicated.

In addition, instead of or in addition to the configuration in which one open / close execution mode is preferentially executed and the other open / close execution mode is not executed, one open / close execution mode is executed and the other open / close execution mode is set to the one. It may be configured to be executed after the opening / closing execution mode. As a configuration in which one of the overlapping open / close execution modes may not be executed or both may be executed, it is preferable to determine whether or not to execute the overlapping open / close execution modes later by lottery or the like. Further, when a plurality of opening / closing modes of the opening / closing execution mode based on the special deviation result are set, there may be a difference in the ratio between the case where the opening / closing execution mode is performed in duplicate and the case where the opening / closing mode is not performed according to the advantage. It may be configured to determine the order in which the duplication is carried out according to the degree.

The high probability mode flag is stored in step S2501, none of the high frequency support mode flags are stored in step S2502, the high frequency counter is not 0 in step S2504, or step S2506. After executing the process of, the other process for ending the variation is executed in step S2507, and then the process for ending the variation is terminated. In the other processing, processing is performed so that the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b becomes a stop result corresponding to the current game result.

That is, when the first normal jackpot result or the second normal jackpot result is obtained in the present embodiment, the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode with a limited number of times is set. Then, each time the game times on the first special figure side and the game times on the second special figure side are completed, the number of times of the high frequency support mode is updated, and the game times on the first special figure side and the second special figure are updated. When the total number of games with the side game reaches the upper limit (100 times), the high frequency support mode ends. Further, during the first high frequency state or the second high frequency state, any of the jackpot results is obtained, so that the game state update process (transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode) is performed, for example, again. When the 1 high frequency state or the 2nd high frequency state is set, the upper limit number of times is reset. Therefore, in the forced termination process (FIG. 22) based on the jackpot winning, the update process is not performed frequently.

Next, the variable display time setting process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45 and the variable display time tables of FIGS. 46 and 47.

First, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the second high frequency support mode flag is stored. The case where the second high frequency support flag is stored includes the case where the second high frequency state is stored and the probability change state. On the other hand, the case where the second high frequency support flag is not stored includes the case where the first high frequency state is used and the normal game state. Then, when a negative determination is made in step S2601, that is, in the first high frequency state or the normal gaming state, the variation display time table for the normal gaming state and the first high frequency state is acquired in step S2602. Then, the process of specifying the variable display time of the game times this time is executed.

As shown in FIG. 46, the fluctuation display time table for the normal game state and the first high frequency state includes the fluctuation display time table for the first special figure (FIG. 46 (a)) at the time of big hit and special deviation, and the normal The first special figure variation display time table (Fig. 46 (b)) at the time of deviation, the second special figure variation display time table (Fig. 46 (c)) at the time of big hit and special deviation, and the normal deviation A variable display time table for the second special figure (FIG. 46 (d)) is set. Each of these variable display time tables is the same as each variable display time table (FIG. 12) in the normal gaming state in the first and second embodiments. That is, the game times on the second special figure side are basically set to have a longer variable display time than the game times on the first special figure side, and especially in the game times on the second special figure side. The fluctuation display time at the time of normal deviation is a length (6000 sec) that makes it difficult to realize a smooth game without substantially completing the game round regardless of the values of the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS. On the other hand, when a big hit or a special loss occurs in the game times on the second special figure side, a relatively short fluctuation display time (10 sec) is selected regardless of the values of the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS. In spite of the fact that the game round shifts to the open / close execution mode, the inconvenience that the game round does not end easily is avoided. For the game times on the first special figure side, the fluctuation display time is set according to the values of the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS, and the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation, and the fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation display time. (Presence / absence of reach occurrence and type of reach) is set.

In step S2602, if the game times to be executed this time are the game times on the first special figure side, the variation display time table for the first special figure corresponding to the game result is acquired, and the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter are acquired. Based on the CS and the number of pending games, the variable display time of the current game times is specified. If the game time to be executed this time is the game time on the second special figure side, the variation display time for the second special figure corresponding to the game result is acquired, and the fluctuation display time of the current game time is specified. To do.

On the other hand, when an affirmative judgment is made in step S2601, that is, in the case of the second high frequency state or the probable change state, the variation display time table for the second high frequency state and the probable change state is acquired in step S2603. , Execute the process of specifying the variable display time of the current game times.

As shown in FIG. 47, the fluctuation display time table for the second high frequency state and the probabilistic change state is the fluctuation display time table for the first special figure (FIG. 47 (a)) at the time of big hit and special deviation, and the normal deviation. The first special figure variation display time table (FIG. 47 (b)) at the time, the second special figure variation display time table (FIG. 47 (c)) at the time of big hit and special deviation, and the first at the time of normal deviation. 2 A variable display time table for special figures (FIG. 47 (d)) and is set. Each of these fluctuation display time tables is the same as each fluctuation display time table (FIG. 13) in the first probability variation state in the first and second embodiments. That is, the game times on the first special figure side are basically set to have a longer variable display time than the game times on the second special figure side, and especially in the game times on the first special figure side. The fluctuation display time at the time of normal deviation is a length (6000 sec) that makes it difficult to realize a smooth game without substantially completing the game round regardless of the values of the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS. On the other hand, if a big hit or a special loss occurs in the game on the first special figure side, a relatively short fluctuation display time (10 sec) is selected regardless of the values of the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS. In spite of the fact that the game round shifts to the open / close execution mode, the inconvenience that the game round does not end easily is avoided. For the game times on the second special figure side, the fluctuation display time is set according to the values of the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS, and the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation, and the fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation display time. (Presence / absence of reach occurrence and type of reach) is set. In this case, each variation display time of the game times on the second special figure side tends to be shorter than each variation display time of the game times on the first special figure side for the normal game state and the first high frequency state. It has become.

In step S2603, if the game number to be executed this time is the game time on the first special figure side, the variation display time table for the first special figure corresponding to the game result is acquired, and the variation display time of the current game time is obtained. To identify. If the game time to be executed this time is the game time on the second special figure side, the variation display time table for the second special figure corresponding to the game result is acquired, and the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS, And, based on the reserved number, the variation display time of the current game times is specified.

After executing the process of step S2602 or step S2603, in step S2604, the information of the fluctuation display time specified in the process of step S2602 or step S2603 is input to the corresponding progress counter of various counter areas 233, and this The variable display time setting process ends.

That is, in the present embodiment, as the variable display time table, the normal game state and the first high frequency in which a longer variable display time is more likely to be selected for the game times on the second special figure side than for the game times on the first special figure side. The variation display time table for the state and the variation display for the second high frequency state and the probability variation state in which the game times on the first special figure side are easier to select than the game times on the second special figure side. The time table and is set. In particular, in the variable display time table for the normal gaming state and the first high frequency state, the same variable display time table is used although the support by the electric accessory 52a differs between the low frequency and the high frequency.

Further, the mode of support by the electric accessory 52a is the same. The reference variable display time table differs between the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, and in the first high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory The variation display time on the second special figure side on the side where the object 52a is provided tends to be longer than the variation display time on the first special figure side on the side where the electric accessory 52a is not provided. .. Further, in the second high-frequency support mode, the variation display time on the second special figure side on the side where the electric accessory 52a is provided is the first special figure side on the side where the electric accessory 52a is not provided. It tends to be shorter than the fluctuation display time of.

Using such a variable display time table, how the game times on the first special figure side and the game times on the second special figure side progress will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 48 and 49. ..

First, the state of the normal gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 48 (a).

In the normal gaming state, the electric accessory 52a of the fourth operating port 52 is set to the low frequency support mode in which it is difficult to open. Therefore, when the game ball is launched aiming at the third operating port 51 and the fourth operating port 52, the third operating port 51 is more likely to win a prize than the fourth operating port 52. Assuming that a prize is won in the third operating port 51 at the timing of ta1, a winning / failing lottery on the first special drawing side is performed at that timing, and a game round in which a relatively short variable display time is set starts. Then, the game round ends at the timing of ta3, and the result of the winning / failing lottery on the first special drawing side carried out at the timing of ta1 is notified. If a prize is generated again in the third operating port 51 at the timing of ta2, which is the timing before ta3, the number of reservations on the first special drawing side becomes one, and when the game round ends at the timing of ta3. Subsequently, the game round for the hold information acquired in ta2 is started at the timing of ta4. That is, the winning / failing lottery for the reserved information acquired in ta2 is also carried out at the timing of ta4.

As for the game rounds started at ta4, a relatively short variable display time is set, the game rounds end at the timing of ta6, and the result of the winning / failing lottery on the first special drawing side carried out at the timing of ta4. Is notified. For example, when a prize is generated in the fourth operating port 52 at the timing of ta5, a winning / losing lottery on the second special drawing side is performed based on the winning, while the game times based on the winning have a long variable display time. Is set. Then, the game round on the second special drawing side, which starts at the timing of ta5, does not substantially end (ends after 6000 sec), and even if the subsequent game ball wins the fourth operating port 52, The lottery for winning or failing the pending information based on the prize will not be held easily. In addition, it is difficult to notify the result of the winning / failing lottery on the second special drawing side, which was carried out at the timing of ta5.

On the other hand, in the game round on the first special figure side, for example, the game round that started at the timing of ta4 ends at the timing of ta6, and then if a prize is generated to the third operating port 51 at the timing of ta7, the third operation is performed again. 1 The winning / failing lottery on the special drawing side is performed, and the result is notified at the timing of ta8.

In this way, in the normal gaming state, when the game is performed aiming at the third operating port 51 and the fourth operating port 52, the game times on the first special drawing side based on the winning of the third operating port 51 are substantially performed. Can be advanced to. In other words, even if a prize is accidentally generated in the fourth operating port 52, the game times on the second special drawing side based on the prize cannot be substantially advanced.

In addition, if a big hit result or a special miss result is obtained in the winning / failing lottery on the side of the second special drawing that happens to win, it will be notified promptly. However, if there is hold information for the normal loss result as hold information to be digested before the jackpot result or special loss result, if the game round for the hold information for the normal loss result is not completed, these The game times of the jackpot result and the special miss result will not be started.

Next, the state of the second high frequency state and the probable change state will be described with reference to FIG. 48 (b).

Even in the second high frequency state and the probabilistic state, if the game is played aiming at the third operating port 51 and the fourth operating port 52, a prize may occur in the third operating port 51. However, in these states, a long variable display time is set for the game times on the first special drawing side based on the winning of the third operating port 51. Specifically, for example, even if a prize is won in the third operating port 51 at the timing of tb1, the result of the winning / failing lottery on the first special drawing side, which is carried out at the timing of tb1, is not easily notified, and Even if a prize is won in the third operating port 51 after that, the winning / failing lottery on the first special drawing side is not carried out unless the game round started at the timing of the tb1 is completed.

On the other hand, in the second high frequency state or the probability change state, since the high frequency support mode is set, the electric accessory 52a of the fourth operating port 52 is likely to be in the open state, and the fourth operating port 52 is frequently awarded. Occurs in. For example, when a prize is won in the fourth operating port 52 at the timing of tb2, a winning / failing lottery on the second special drawing side is carried out, and a relatively short variable display time is set on the second special drawing side. The game round is started. Then, when the game round ends at the timing of tb3, the result of the winning / failing lottery carried out at the timing of tb2 is notified. In the high-frequency support mode, winning of the 4th operating port 52 occurs frequently, and even if the previous game round ends at the timing of tb3, the winning / failing lottery on the 2nd special drawing side is continued again at the timing of tb4. Is carried out, and the game round on the second special drawing side is started. Then, the game round ends at the timing of tb5, and the result of the winning / failing lottery carried out at the timing of tb4 is notified. After that, the winning of the fourth operating port 52 frequently occurs, and the game times on the second special drawing side are frequently carried out with short-term fluctuations.

Then, this second high-frequency support mode continues until one of the big hit results is obtained in the probabilistic state, and in the second high-frequency state, the big hit result or the number of game times is the first special figure. The second high-frequency support mode ends (reset) based on the maximum number of times (100 times) including the game times on the side. In the case of the second high frequency state, as described above, the game times on the first special figure side are substantially not progressed, and the update process of the high frequency counter is performed at the end of the game times. Therefore, the upper limit of the number of game times in the second high frequency state is substantially the number of game times on the second special figure side.

Next, the state of the first high frequency state will be described with reference to FIG. 49.

Even in the first high frequency state, if the third operating port 51 and the fourth operating port 52 are aimed at, the third operating port 51 can be won. Then, when a prize is generated in the third operating port 51 at the timing of tc1, the winning / failing lottery on the first special drawing side is carried out, and the first special drawing side in which the same variable display time as in the normal game state is set. The game round of is started. Then, the game round ends at the timing of tk7. In this case, if the hold information on the first special drawing side is acquired, after the game round is completed at the timing of tk7, the winning / failing lottery on the first special drawing side is continuously carried out at the timing of tk8, and the winning / failing lottery is performed. The game round corresponding to the above is started, and the result of the winning / failing lottery carried out at the timing of the tc8 is notified at the timing of the tc10. That is, even in the first high frequency state, the game times on the first special figure side proceed at the same speed as in the normal game state.

On the other hand, a prize is frequently generated in the fourth operating port 52, unlike the normal gaming state. For example, when a prize is generated in the fourth operating port 52 at the timing of tb2, a winning / failing lottery on the second special drawing side is carried out, and a game round on the second special drawing side is started. However, in the first high frequency state, a long variable display time of the game times on the second special drawing side is selected, so that the game times started at the timing of the tb2 are not substantially ended. (Ends after 6000 seconds), the winning / failing lottery on the second special drawing side does not proceed easily.

Although the winning / failing lottery on the second special drawing side does not proceed, winning a prize in the fourth operating port 52 frequently occurs. That is, at the timing of tb3, tb4, tb5, tb6, tb9 ... During the game round started at the timing of tb2, the fourth operating port 52 is continuously won a prize. Then, it can be said that the winning of the fourth operating port 52 after tb3 is substantially the winning / failing lottery on the second special drawing side.

In particular, at the time of winning a prize in the fourth operating port 52 at the timings of tb2, tb3, tb4, tb5, and tb6, the hold information for the winning / losing lottery on the second special drawing side is acquired, while after the timing of tb9. At the time of winning the prize in the fourth operating port 52, since the number of reserved items has reached the upper limit number (4 items), the reserved information for the winning / losing lottery on the second special drawing side is not even acquired. However, at any timing, the prize ball is paid out based on the winning of the fourth operating port 52.

The first high-frequency state ends (reset) based on the result of a big hit or the number of game times reaching the upper limit (100 times) together with the game times on the second special drawing side. As described above, the game times on the second special figure side are substantially not progressed, and the update process of the high frequency counter is performed at the end of the game times, so that the first high frequency The upper limit of the number of game times in the state is substantially the number of game times on the first special drawing side.

The flow of the game of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51 together with an outline of each game state.

For example, when a prize is generated in the third operating port 51 at the timing of t1 which is a normal game state, the game round on the first special drawing side is performed. In the normal game state, the fluctuation display time on the first special figure side is relatively short, and the fluctuation display time on the second special figure side is relatively long. Therefore, the game that can be substantially advanced is the game on the first special figure side. .. Further, in the normal game state, since the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, it is difficult to win a prize in the fourth operating port 52, and the third operating port 51 is entered. The winning or losing lottery on the 1st special drawing side based on the winning is unlikely to be a big hit result. As a result, the number of balls held by the player gradually decreases as the game progresses.

When a big hit is won in the game on the first special figure side at the timing of t2, the distribution table for the first special figure is referred to, and the type of the big hit result this time is determined. In this case, for example, assuming that the game is distributed to the probability variation jackpot result, the game state is set to the probability variation state at the timing of t3 when the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result ends. In addition, based on the jackpot result, the number of balls held by the player has increased significantly.

In the probabilistic state, the variation display time on the first special figure side is long, and the variation display time on the second special figure side is short, so that the game that can be substantially advanced is the game on the second special figure side. In addition, in the probability change state, since the high-frequency support mode is set, the winning / losing lottery on the second special figure side can be received without reducing the number of balls held so much, and the high-probability mode is set, so that the jackpot is relatively early. It is easy to win.

When a jackpot is won in the game on the second special figure side at the timing of t4, the distribution table for the second special figure is referred to, and the type of the jackpot result of this time is determined. In this case, for example, assuming that the game is distributed to the second normal jackpot result, the game state is set to the second high frequency state at the timing of t5 when the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result ends. It should be noted that, based on the jackpot result, the number of balls held by the player has increased significantly, and it is shown that there is no decrease in the number of balls held during the probability change state.

In the second high frequency state, as in the probabilistic state, the fluctuation display time on the first special figure side is long, and the fluctuation display time on the second special figure side is short, so that the game that can be substantially advanced is the second special figure. It will be a game on the side. Further, in the second high frequency state, since the high frequency support mode is set, it is possible to receive the winning / failing lottery on the second special drawing side without significantly reducing the number of balls held. However, since the winning / losing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode, it is unlikely to be a big hit winning compared to the probability change state.

When the jackpot is won again at the timing of t6, which is the second high frequency state, the type of the jackpot result of this time is determined by referring to the distribution table for the second special figure in the same manner as the timing of t4. .. Also in this case, assuming that the results are distributed to the second normal jackpot results, the second high frequency state is set at the timing of t7 when the open / close execution mode ends. In this case, the high frequency counter is reset in the second high frequency state.

For example, at the timing of t8, when the number of game times in the second high frequency state reaches the upper limit, the game state is set to the normal game state. Then, the game that can be substantially advanced is changed from the game on the second special figure side to the game on the first special figure side. By the way, in the variable end processing on the second special drawing side, which reaches the upper limit number of times at the timing of t8, the forced end processing (step S2506) of the game times on the first special drawing side is executed. Because of this, when switching between the game on the first special figure side and the game on the second special figure side occurs without sandwiching the open / close execution mode, both game times have a long variable display time. It is possible to avoid the event.

When the normal game state is reached at the timing of t8, the number of balls held gradually decreases because of the low frequency support mode and the low probability mode. When the jackpot result is obtained at the timing of t9, the type of the jackpot result this time is determined by referring to the distribution table for the first special figure. In this case, assuming that the results are distributed to the first normal jackpot results, the first high frequency state is set at the timing of t10 when the open / close execution mode ends.

In the first high frequency state, the variation display time on the first special figure side is short, and the variation display time on the second special figure side is long. Therefore, the game that can be substantially advanced is the game on the first special figure side. Further, in the first high frequency state, since the high frequency support mode is set, it is possible to receive the winning / failing lottery on the first special drawing side without significantly reducing the number of balls held. However, since the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode, it is unlikely that a big hit will be won as compared with the probability change state.

Here, the variation display time on the first special figure side in the first high frequency state is longer than the variation display time on the second special figure side in the second high frequency state, and the variation on the first special figure side in the normal gaming state. The one with the same length as the display time is set. Then, although the support by the electric accessory 52a is high in the first high frequency state, the digestion speed of the game times is slower than that in the second high frequency state and the probabilistic state, and the digestion speed is about the same as the normal game state. .. In other words, it can be said that the first high-frequency state is a game state in which it is possible to digest the game times at the same digestion speed as the normal game state while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held.

When the jackpot result is obtained again at the timing of t11 in the first high frequency state, the type of the jackpot result this time is determined by referring to the distribution table for the first special figure. In this case as well, for example, assuming that the results are distributed to the first normal jackpot results, the first high frequency state is set at the timing of t12 when the open / close execution mode ends. In this case, the high frequency counter is reset in the first high frequency state.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The variable display time on the 2nd special drawing side based on the winning of the 4th operating port 52, which is easier to win than the 3rd operating port 51 by being set to the 1st high frequency support mode, is transferred to the 3rd operating port 51. It is easy to make it longer than the variable display time on the 1st special drawing side based on the prize. As a result, although the winning of the 4th operating port 52 occurs frequently, it is possible to create a situation in which the winning / failing lottery on the 2nd special drawing side based on the winning of the 4th operating port 52 does not substantially occur. Will be. In such a situation, the winning / failing lottery based on the winning of the 4th operating port 52 is not performed, but only the prize ball based on the winning of the 4th operating port 52 is generated. Then, it becomes possible to assist the holding ball by using the fourth operating port 52, which is the ball entry portion on the second special drawing side where the winning / failing lottery can be performed.

In the first high-frequency support mode, by making it possible to execute the game on the first special drawing side based on the winning of the third operating port 51, while obtaining the assistance of the ball held based on the winning of the fourth operating port 52. Also, it is possible to execute the game on the first special drawing side. That is, the configuration is such that the game on the first special figure side different from the second special figure side, which facilitates entry into the ball, can be substantially executed, and a novel game property completely different from the conventional game machine is realized. can do.

Comparing the first high-frequency state in which the game on the first special figure side is performed and the second high-frequency state in which the game on the second special figure side is performed, both are in the low probability mode and the number of balls held is reduced. Is reduced, but the progress speed is faster in the second high frequency state and slower in the first high frequency state. Therefore, the second high-frequency state can be said to be a preferable gaming state for a player who wants to increase the number of gaming times per unit time. On the other hand, for a player who wants to play for a long time, it can be said that the first high frequency state is a preferable gaming state. In this way, although the winning / losing lottery probability and how to reduce the number of balls held are the same in the first high frequency state and the second high frequency state, the progress speed is different to meet the diverse needs of the player. It is possible to realize playability.

When the jackpot result is obtained in the game on the first special figure side in the normal game state or the first high frequency state, it is divided into either the first normal jackpot result or the probabilistic jackpot result. When the first normal jackpot result is obtained, the game on the first special figure side is continued, and when the probability variation jackpot result is obtained, the game on the first special figure side is switched to the game on the second special figure side. Further, when a big hit result is obtained in the game on the second special figure side, it is distributed to the second normal big hit result or the probabilistic big hit result. In this case, the game on the second special figure side will be continued regardless of the jackpot result. On the other hand, when the number of game times that can be executed in the second high frequency state reaches the upper limit, the game shifts to the normal game state. In this way, by configuring the game on the 1st special figure side and the game on the 2nd special figure side to come and go, only one of the games is not continued endlessly, and each game is sufficiently playable. Can be entertained.

The first high-frequency state and the second high-frequency state are both the same high-frequency support mode, and both are low-probability modes. In other words, the only difference between the 1st high frequency state and the 2nd high frequency state is whether the game that can be progressed is the 1st special figure side or the 2nd special figure side, and the difference in the progress speed of the game. There is no difference in how to reduce the number of balls and how easy it is to win a big hit. By providing such a game state, it is possible to realize diversification of games without providing a large difference in advantage.

Further, in either the first high frequency state or the second high frequency state, the third operating port 51 or the fourth operating port 52 may be aimed at, and it becomes necessary to make the firing mode different in each high frequency state. Absent. As a result, the game can be made easy to understand. In addition, since both operating ports 51 and 52 cannot be separated, it is difficult for the player to select the game on the first special drawing side and the game on the second special drawing side, so that the game can be played as designed. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to avoid an event in which the ball output rate is extremely increased or decreased due to a game not intended by the designer.

Although the method of reducing the number of balls held differs between the normal game state and the first high frequency state, the game times that can be substantially advanced are the same as the game times on the first special figure side. In addition, the probability of winning or losing lottery is the same in the low probability mode. Further, it can be said that the normal game state and the first high frequency state have the same progress speed because the variable display time table is the same. Then, it is possible to realize a novel game state in which the winning / failing lottery configuration (lottery probability and distribution table) is the same, and only the method of reducing the number of balls held is different without changing the progress speed.

In addition, apart from the state in which the game on the second special figure side, which makes it easy to enter the ball as in the second high-frequency support mode, is practically feasible, it is easy to enter the ball as in the first high-frequency support mode. It is possible to realize a state in which the game on the first special figure side, which is not the side to be, can be substantially executed by one electric accessory 52a, and moreover, the start prize on the second special figure side. It is a configuration that assists the holding ball by winning a prize in the fourth operating port 52, which is the mouth, and the functions of each configuration are integrated to realize the above-mentioned novel playability but not to increase the number of components. It becomes possible to.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, a predetermined privilege is given when a prize exceeding the maximum number of reserved pieces is generated in the operating port. In this embodiment, the case where the game board 24 in the third embodiment is used will be described. Further, the case where the variable display time table of the third embodiment is used will be described.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a winning process for the operating port in the present embodiment. As described above, the winning process for the operating port is the process performed in step S105 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15).

In the present embodiment, similarly to the processes of steps S201 to S212, the processes based on the winning of the third operating port 51 and the processing based on the winning of the fourth operating port 52 are performed in steps S2701 to S2712. .. However, in the present embodiment, the processing when it is determined in step S2703 or step S2709 that the winning number exceeds the upper limit of the number of holdings is different.

That is, in the present embodiment, when it is determined in step S2703 that the winning of the third operating port 51 this time exceeds the pending upper limit number, the first upper limit winning command is directed and controlled in step S2713. It is set as an output target to the device 82. Then, the process proceeds to the winning determination process of the fourth operating port 52 in step S2707. The first upper limit winning command is a command for causing the effect control device 82 on the sub side to grasp that a winning exceeding the reserved upper limit number has occurred on the first special drawing side, and the command is an external output process in the normal processing. Is output to the effect control device 82.

Further, in step S2709, when it is determined that the winning of the fourth operating port 52 this time exceeds the pending upper limit number, the second upper limit winning command is output to the effect control device 82 in step S2714. Set as a target. After that, the winning process for the operating port is completed. The second upper limit winning command is a command for causing the effect control device 82 on the sub side to know that a winning exceeding the reserved upper limit number has occurred on the second special drawing side, and the command is an external output process in the normal processing. Is output to the effect control device 82.

Next, the processing corresponding to the upper limit winning command performed on the effect control device 82 side will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53. A MPU is mounted on the control board of the effect control device 82, and the MPU has a ROM that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU, and is stored in the ROM. It has a built-in RAM, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing a control program, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. Then, as a kind of control program stored in the ROM, the periodic processing for the effect is set, and the periodic process for the effect is periodically started by the timer circuit. The processing corresponding to the upper limit winning command is performed as one of the periodic processing for the production.

In the process corresponding to the upper limit winning command, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the first upper limit winning command has been received. By the way, the RAM of the effect control device 82 is provided with a command storage area configured as a ring buffer in which a plurality of commands can be individually stored and can be read from the previously stored commands, and the plurality of commands can be stored in the same RAM. Even if it is received at the appropriate time, the processing corresponding to each of these commands can be executed satisfactorily.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, the update process of the first upper limit counter is executed in step S2802. The first upper limit counter is a counter provided in the RAM, and is a counter for the MPU of the effect control device 82 to specify the number of times a prize has been generated in excess of the holding upper limit number during a predetermined period. In step S2802, a process of adding 1 to the first upper limit counter and updating the counter is executed.

In the following step S2803, a process of setting the first corresponding effect corresponding to the value of the first upper limit counter after the update of step S2802 is executed. This first corresponding effect will be described in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in step S2801, or after the process of step S2803 is executed, it is determined in step S2804 whether or not the second upper limit winning command has been received. If it has been received, the update process of the second upper limit counter is executed in step S2805. The second upper limit counter corresponds to the first upper limit counter, and the counter is also provided in the RAM. Then, in step S2805, a process of adding 1 to the second upper limit counter and updating it is executed.

In the following step S2806, a process of setting the second corresponding effect corresponding to the value of the second upper limit counter after the update of step S2803 is executed. This second corresponding effect will be described in detail later.

When a negative determination is made in step S2804, or after the process of step S2806 is executed, it is determined in step S2807 whether or not the clear condition (condition for resetting to the initial value) of the upper limit counter is satisfied. The conditions for clearing the upper limit counter are, for example, that a predetermined period has passed since the last upper limit winning command was received (after affirmative judgment was made in step S2801 or step S2804), the first special figure side and the second special. The game round on the drawing side has ended and the hold information has not been stored, the open / close execution mode has started, the open / close execution mode has ended, or one of the high-frequency support modes has ended. , Etc.

In addition, each of the above clearing conditions may be applied, a part of them may be applied in combination, or all of them may be applied in combination. In addition to the above clearing conditions, a condition for clearing the upper limit counter may be provided.

For example, in the case of a configuration in which the upper limit counter is cleared based on the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 60 sec) after receiving the last upper limit winning command, the following may be performed. That is, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2801 or step S2803, a numerical value corresponding to a predetermined period is input to predetermined progress counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM in the effect control device 82. The predetermined progress counter is configured to be subtracted at a predetermined cycle. Then, when the predetermined progress counter becomes the initial value (0), in step S2806, it can be grasped that the predetermined period has elapsed since the last upper limit counter was received.

If it is determined in step S2806 that the clearing condition is satisfied, the upper limit counter is cleared in step S2807. In this clearing process, both the first upper limit counter and the second upper limit counter may be cleared, or only one upper limit counter may be cleared. When clearing only one, for example, when clearing based on the passage of a predetermined period, a predetermined progress counter is provided separately on the first special figure side and the second special figure side, and the final upper limit winning command is received for each. It is advisable to use a corresponding progress counter to grasp the period since then.

If a negative determination is made in step S2807, or after the process of step S2808 is executed, the process corresponding to the upper limit winning command is terminated.

The first corresponding effect and the second corresponding effect will be described with reference to FIG. 54. Although only the second corresponding effect will be described here, the first corresponding effect may be the same as the second corresponding effect, or the effect may be different to the extent that the player can identify each other. It may be.

FIG. 54 (a) shows the state of the display screen 42a in the first high-frequency support mode. As described above, in the first high-frequency support mode, the fourth operating port 52 is more likely to win a prize than the third operating port 51, and the variation on the first special drawing side based on the winning of the third operating port 51 The variable display time on the second special drawing side based on the winning of the fourth operating port 52 is set longer than the display time. Therefore, the reserved information on the second special drawing side is difficult to be digested, and a prize is likely to occur in the fourth operating port 52 exceeding the upper limit reserved number.

In the figure, in the situation where the variable display of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is performed on the display screen 42a (the figure shows the variable display corresponding to the game times on the first special figure side), the first special feature A hold image corresponding to the number of holds is displayed in the special figure display area Ga on the drawing side (in the figure, it is shown that two hold information is stored), and the special figure display area on the second special figure side. A hold image corresponding to the number of holds is also displayed on Gb (the figure shows that four hold information is stored). Then, in both execution display areas GA and GB, hold information corresponding to each game time executed in the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b is displayed.

In the special figure display area Gb on the second special figure side, four holding images corresponding to the upper limit holding number are displayed, and the holding information of the upper limit holding number is stored. When the hold information of the upper limit hold number is stored, for example, the second corresponding effect may occur in the specific area GP above the special figure display area Gb and not overlapping the variable display of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3. An upper limit notice is displayed to indicate the situation. As a notice display for the upper limit, for example, a character such as "If you win, you can draw a fortune!" Is displayed to suggest that some privilege can be given by winning a prize exceeding the upper limit reserved number.

For example, if the second upper limit counter is "1", "today's" is displayed in the specific area GP as shown in FIG. 54 (b). If the second upper limit counter is "5", as shown in FIG. 54 (c), "today's yours" is displayed following the display content in the case of "1". If the second upper limit counter is "10", as shown in FIG. 54 (d), "What is your fortune today !!" is displayed following the display content in the case of "5". In this way, if the display content is updated as the upper limit counter increases, it is possible to make it meaningful for the player who wants to see the display content to the end to generate a prize exceeding the upper limit reserved number.

Then, if the second upper limit counter is "15", as shown in FIG. 54 (e), "Kokichi !!" is displayed to notify the result of the Omikuji. The content of this Omikuji may be decided by lottery from among "Kokichi", "Nakayoshi", "Daikichi" and the like.

As shown in FIG. 54 (f), when the second upper limit counter becomes "20", the result of the Omikuji displayed when it becomes "15" is updated (promoted) and "Nakayoshi !!" It may be configured to be displayed. Further, when the second upper limit counter is further added (a prize is generated to the fourth operating port 52) and the second upper limit counter becomes "30", the case of "15" or "20" is further increased. It may be updated (promoted) and displayed as "Daikichi !!". In this way, even after the number of prizes exceeding the maximum number of reserved items reaches a predetermined number, it is possible to motivate the generation of prizes exceeding the maximum number of items held.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a prize exceeding the maximum number of reserved cards is generated, the privilege of notifying the contents of the fortune-telling is given, so that the game is based on the prize in the operation port where it is easy to win. In a configuration in which the variable display time of the times is long, it is possible to enhance the merit of generating a prize exceeding the maximum number of pending numbers for which the winning / losing lottery for big hits is not performed.

When a prize exceeds the maximum number of pending games, the player is given a privilege of content (Omikuji) that has nothing to do with the content of the game being played, so the enjoyment is different from that of the game being played. Can be granted. Here, as described in the third embodiment, the hold information on the second special figure side in the first high frequency support mode, the hold information on the first special figure side in the second high frequency support mode, and the second in the probabilistic state. 1 Hold information on the special drawing side is easy to accumulate, and winning is likely to occur in excess of the maximum number of holds. In other words, both are in a state that is more advantageous than the normal game state, and in such a state, there is a possibility that interest in the content of the game times will be lower than in the normal game state, such as when a big hit is in a row. It gets higher. Therefore, based on the fact that the winning number exceeds the maximum number of reserved items as described above, the production of the content completely different from the content of the game is generated, so that it is easy to attract the attention of the player and the total game. It becomes possible to keep the degree of attention to.

The above embodiment may be modified as follows.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a hold image change process performed on the effect control device 82 side. The hold image change process changes the hold image displayed in the special figure display area Ga on the first special figure side or the special figure display area Gb on the second special figure side of the display screen 42a at a predetermined opportunity. This process is performed as one of the periodic processes for the above-mentioned effect.

In step S2901, it is determined whether or not an opportunity to change the reserved image has occurred. As a change trigger, in this modification, the hold command output from the main controller 81 when the hold information on the first special figure side or the second special figure side is acquired is received, or the above upper limit winning command is received. Has been received. That is, in this modification, if a prize is generated in the third operating port 51 or the fourth operating port 52, an opportunity to change the holding image will occur. If neither command has been received and no change trigger has occurred, this change process is terminated as it is.

If any of the commands has been received, in step S2902, a process of inputting the current number of holds to the confirmation counter K is executed. For example, when the number of reservations on the first special drawing side is 2 and the number of reservations on the second special drawing side is 4, the number of reservations on the first special drawing side and the second special drawing side is displayed on the confirmation counter K. The total number of 6 is entered.

In the following step S2903, a hold image change lottery is executed. In the hold image change lottery, the change lottery table stored in the ROM in the MPU of the effect control device 82 is acquired, and the lottery counter is acquired from the RAM in the MPU, and the currently displayed hold image is displayed. Execute a lottery as to whether or not to change. As shown in FIG. 56A, the change lottery table is set so that the winning probability differs depending on the value of the upper limit winning counter, and the larger the value of the upper limit winning counter, the higher the winning probability. It has been set.

By the way, in this table, the value of the upper limit winning counter shows the total value of the first upper limit winning counter and the second upper limit winning counter. However, the larger the value of the first upper limit winning counter, the easier it is to win, and the larger the value of the second upper limit winning counter, the harder it is to win. The first upper limit winning counter and the second upper limit winning counter are set as separate parameters. It may be configured as such. In addition, a change lottery table for the first special figure and a change lottery table for the second special figure are separately provided, and a second upper limit winning counter is set in the change lottery table for the first special figure, and the second The change lottery table for special figures is configured to set the first upper limit winning counter, or vice versa, the first upper limit winning counter is set on the first special drawing side, and the second upper limit is set on the second special drawing side. It may be configured to set a winning counter. When the first upper limit winning counter is received, it is assumed that the game round on the second special drawing side is in progress instead of the first special drawing side, and when the second upper limit winning counter is received, the second upper limit winning counter is received. 2 It is assumed that the game rounds on the first special figure side, not on the special figure side, are in progress. In that respect, by making it easier to change the hold image on the side that is not the received upper limit winning counter, it is easier to make it relevant to the ongoing game times, and the hold image on the same side as the received upper limit winning counter By making it easy to change, it is possible to give a strong impression that it is an independent production that has nothing to do with the ongoing game times.

In the following step S2904, it is determined whether or not the change lottery in step S2903 has been won. If the image is won, the change process for changing the pending image currently displayed in step S2905 is executed. In this case, the MPU of the effect control device 82 outputs a change command to the display control device 212. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 212 reads the data of the hold image for change stored in advance, and the hold image corresponding to the data of the hold image for change is the display screen of the symbol display device 42. Control so that it is displayed on 42a.

In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the circular holding image (see FIG. 54 (a)) that has been displayed up to that point is changed to the holding image in which the girl is dancing. By doing so, it is possible to give the player the impression that the current state is a special state different from the previous state, and the changed hold image is likely to be a big hit result. It is possible to make people think that it is not. As a result, the degree of attention to the game is increased. After executing the process of step S2905, the confirmation counter K is cleared to 0 in step S2906, and then the pending image change process is terminated.

If the winner is not won in step S2904, the process of subtracting 1 from the confirmation counter K is executed in step S2907. Then, in step S2908, it is determined whether or not the confirmation counter K has become 0 based on the processing result of step S2907. When it becomes 0, the holding image change process is terminated as it is. If it is not 0, the process returns to step S2903 and the change lottery is executed again.

That is, in this modified example, the larger the value of the upper limit winning counter is, the easier it is to win the change in the change lottery table, and the larger the number of pending changes is, the more times the change lottery is executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to more closely relate the number of pending information and the number of times a prize is generated that exceeds the maximum number of reserved items, and it is possible to motivate the generation of a prize that exceeds the maximum number of reserved items.

In the above configuration, the change lottery is performed without considering the game result of the hold information corresponding to each hold image, and the change hold image is uniformly determined. However, the game result of the hold information is determined. And the length of the fluctuation display time, etc. are grasped by using the counters (C1 to C3, CS) for winning / failing lottery stored in the main control device 81, and the winning probability of the changed lottery and the image for holding after winning. It may be configured to determine.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, by using the configuration of the operating port that is easy to win and has a long fluctuation display time, the game property in which the jackpot result loops twice when a predetermined jackpot result is obtained as in the first and second embodiments is realized. To do. FIG. 57 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 24 in this embodiment. In FIG. 57, the same configurations as those of the game board 24 in the first to fourth embodiments are basically indicated by the same reference numerals, and the description of the same configurations will be omitted.

In the game board 24 in the present embodiment, similarly to the third and fourth embodiments, the lower region PE4 has a third operating port 51 as an operating port on the first special drawing side and a second special drawing side. A fourth operating port 52 as an operating port of the above is provided. The third operating port 51 and the fourth operating port 52 have the same configuration as those of the third and fourth embodiments.

In the lower region PE4, a fourth variable winning device 56 and a fifth variable winning device 57 are provided on the downstream side of the third operating port 51 and the fourth operating port 52. The fourth variable winning device 56 and the fifth variable winning device 57 are installed side by side, and the fourth variable winning device 56 is arranged above the fifth variable winning device 57. The fourth variable winning device 56 has the same configuration as the first variable winning device 32A, and the fifth variable winning device 57 has the same configuration as the second variable winning device 32B. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the fourth variable winning device 56 can be won, and the prize balls are paid out based on the winning. Further, in a predetermined round in the opening / closing execution mode, it is possible to win a prize in the fifth variable winning device 57, and when the winning game ball passes through the V winning area 356, a winning / losing lottery after the opening / closing execution mode is performed. The mode is set to high probability mode.

In the present embodiment, the winning / failing lottery table applies to those of the third and fourth embodiments, and the distribution table applies to those of the first and second embodiments. That is, in the winning / failing lottery table, the probability of a special deviation result is the same regardless of the level of the winning / failing lottery mode, and the probability of the special deviation result is the first special drawing side and the second special drawing side. It has the same probability. In addition, when a jackpot result is obtained, it is distributed to the jackpot result with 1V or the jackpot result without V on the 1st special figure side, and to the jackpot result with 1V or the jackpot result with 2V on the 2nd special figure side. Be done. As already explained, in the case of the 1st V and big hit result and the 2nd V and big hit result, it is easy to pass through the V winning area 356 of the 5th variable winning device 57 during the opening / closing execution mode, and the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is set. Easy to set to high probability mode. Further, in the case of a big hit result without V, it is difficult to pass through the V winning area 356 of the fifth variable winning device 57 during the opening / closing execution mode, and the winning / losing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is likely to be set to the low probability mode.

In the present embodiment, the support mode after the big hit result with the first V and the support mode after the big hit result with the second V are both set to the high frequency support mode in which the electric accessory 52a is likely to be in the open state, but the first A difference is provided between the variable display time table on the special drawing side and the variable display time table on the second special drawing side.

Specifically, in the support mode after the jackpot result with the first V, on the first special figure side, the fluctuation display time table at the time of the second high frequency state and the probability change state in the third and fourth embodiments (FIG. 47) is referred to and the variable display time is set. Further, on the second special drawing side, the fluctuation display time table on the first special drawing side in the fluctuation display time table in the normal gaming state and the first high frequency state in the third and fourth embodiments is referred to. The variable display time is set. That is, after the result of the jackpot with the first V, the variation display time on the first special figure side based on the winning of the third operating port 51 is long, and the variation display time on the second special drawing side based on the winning of the fourth operating port 52 is long. The variable display time is set so that it tends to be short. Therefore, the game times on the first special figure side cannot be substantially advanced, and the game times on the second special figure side can be substantially advanced. Therefore, in the first probability variation state in which the first V is present and the transition is based on the jackpot result, the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, and the sorting table is substantially referred to the sorting table for the second special figure. The game is played.

On the other hand, in the support mode after the result of the jackpot with the second V, the fluctuation display time table in the normal game state and the first high frequency state in the third and fourth embodiments is shown in the game times of each special figure (FIG. 46) is referred to and the variable display time is set. That is, after the result of the big hit with the second V, the variation display time on the first special drawing side based on the winning of the third operating port 51 is short, and the variation display time on the second special drawing side based on the winning of the fourth operating port 52 is short. The variable display time is set so that it tends to be long. Therefore, the game times on the second special figure side cannot be substantially advanced, and the game times on the first special figure side can be substantially advanced. Therefore, in the second probability variation state in which the second V is present and the transition is based on the jackpot result, the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, and the sorting table is substantially referred to the sorting table for the first special figure. The game is played.

Further, in the case of the normal game state in which the game state is the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the normal game state and the first high frequency in the above third and fourth embodiments are performed in the game times of each special figure. The fluctuation display time is set with reference to the fluctuation display time table (FIG. 46) in the state.

The state of progress of the game of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58.

As shown in FIGS. 58 (a) and 58 (d), in the normal gaming state, the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, so that the third operating port 51 can be reached. While it is possible to win a prize, it is unlikely that a prize will be given to the fourth operating port 52. Further, the variation display time is set so that the first special drawing side is short and the second special drawing side is long. Then, as a game that can be substantially progressed, it becomes the first special figure game, and when the big hit result is obtained, the distribution table for the first special figure is referred to and the game is distributed to the big hit result with 1V or the big hit result without V. When it is distributed to the jackpot result without V, the game state is set to the normal game state and does not shift to the probability change state.

When the first V is distributed to the jackpot result, the game state shifts to the first probability change state. In the first probability change state, as shown in FIGS. 58 (b) and 58 (d), the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode, so that the third operating port 51 However, winning is more likely to occur in the fourth operating port 52. Further, the variation display time is set so that the first special drawing side is long and the second special drawing side is short. Then, the game that can be substantially progressed is the second special figure game, and when the big hit result is obtained, the distribution table for the second special figure is referred to and the game is distributed to the first V with big hit result or the second V with big hit result. When the first V is distributed to the jackpot result, the gaming state is set to the first probability variation state and the transition of the gaming state does not occur.

When the second V is distributed to the jackpot result, the game state shifts to the second probability change state. In the second probability variation state, as shown in FIGS. 58 (c) and 58 (d), the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode, so that the third operating port 51 However, winning is more likely to occur in the fourth operating port 52. On the other hand, the variation display time is set so that the first special drawing side is short and the second special drawing side is long. Then, as a game that can be substantially progressed, it becomes the first special figure game, and when the big hit result is obtained, the distribution table for the first special figure is referred to and the game is distributed to the big hit result with 1V or the big hit result without V. When distributed to the jackpot result with 1V, the gaming state is set to the first probability variation state, and when distributed to the jackpot result without V, the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state.

In the first probability change state and the second probability change state, since the high frequency support mode is set, the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held. That is, even in the present embodiment, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the two probable change states loop, triggered by the jackpot result with the first V.

Moreover, in the present embodiment, the firing mode is the same in each probability variation state, and it is not necessary to change the firing mode based on the transition of the probability variation state. That is, the third operating port 51 and the fourth operating port 52 are provided as operating ports that cannot be separated or are difficult to separate, and these operating ports that cannot be separated or are difficult to separate are substantially progressing with each other. By configuring the game that can be played and the game that cannot be progressed to coexist, it is possible to realize the transition of the probabilistic state without the need for distinction as in the present embodiment.

Further, although the high frequency support mode is set by shifting to either the first probability change state or the second probability change state, the third operation port 51 and the fourth operation are performed in the first probability change state and the second probability change state. The rate of ball entry into the mouth 52 has not changed. By doing so, a prize ball based on winning a prize in the third operating port 51 and the fourth operating port 52 (particularly the fourth operating port 52) is added, and a probabilistic state in which the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed is realized. be able to.

The present embodiment may be modified as follows.

FIG. 59 (a) is a diagram showing an outline of the operating port of this modified example.

As the actuating port on the first special drawing side in this modified example, the fifth actuating port 100 is provided at a position (lower region PE4) corresponding to the third actuating port 51 in the above embodiment. The fifth operating port 100 is an opening that is opened upward, and a game ball that falls from above can enter the ball. The fifth operating port 100 is not provided with an electric accessory or the like that changes the ball entry rate of the fifth operating port 100.

Below the fifth operating port 100, a specific ball entry portion 130 that is open upward is provided. The specific ball entry unit 130 is provided with an electric accessory 140 that changes the ball entry rate to the specific ball entry unit 130. The electric accessory 140 corresponds to the electric accessory 52a, and the electric accessory 140 is in an open state and a closed state by controlling the electric accessory drive unit 150 connected to the main control device 81. Displace to. When the electric accessory 140 is in the open state, it is possible to enter the specific ball entry unit 130, and when the electric accessory 140 is in the closed state, it is difficult to enter the specific ball entry unit 130. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the ball cannot enter the specific ball entry unit 130 due to the closed state. The electric accessory 140 is likely to be in the open state by being in the high frequency support mode, and is less likely to be in the open state by being in the low frequency support mode.

The passage of the game ball from the specific ball entry unit 130 is bifurcated (first passing area 131 and second passing area 132) on the way. Before the branch, the distribution member 133 is provided at a position where the game ball that has entered the specific entry unit 130 always passes. The game ball that has entered the specific ball entry unit 130 is distributed into the first pass area 131 and the second pass area 132 by the distribution member 133. The distribution member 133 can alternately distribute the game ball to the first passing region 131 and the second passing region 132.

A sixth operating port 110, which is an operating port on the first special drawing side in the present modification, is provided as a ball entry portion for the game ball that has passed through the first passing region 131. That is, in this modification, the operating port on the first special drawing side is provided with the sixth operating port 110 in addition to the fifth operating port 100. Further, a seventh actuating port 120, which is an actuating port on the second special drawing side in the present modification, is provided as a ball entry portion for the game ball that has passed through the second passing region 132.

With the above configuration, when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 140 is unlikely to be in the open state, so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific ball entry unit 130, and the lower region PE4 is set. The flowing game ball enters the fifth operating port 100 side. When the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 140 is likely to be in the open state, so that the ball is likely to enter the specific entry section 130, and the game ball that has entered the specific entry section 130 The ball enters the sixth operating port 110 and the seventh operating port 120 alternately.

As the variation display time table of each game state, as shown in FIGS. 59 (b) to 59 (d), the variation display time table of the normal game state is the same as that of the fifth embodiment, and the first The variable display time is selected, with the special drawing side being short and the second special drawing side being long. As a result, in the normal game state, the game that can be substantially progressed is the game on the first special figure side. As the variation display time table of the first probability variation state that shifts based on the jackpot result with the first V, the second high frequency support mode and the variation display time table in the probability variation state in the third embodiment are selected. That is, as shown in FIG. 59 (c), a variation display time is selected in which the first special drawing side is long and the second special drawing side is short. The variation display time on the second special figure side is shorter than the variation display time on the first special figure side in the normal gaming state. As the variation display time table of the second probability variation state that shifts based on the jackpot result with the second V, the variation display time table for the special figure on the opposite side to that of the first probability variation state is selected. That is, as shown in FIG. 59 (d), the first special figure side is short, the second special figure side is long, and the variable display time is selected, and the variable display time on the first special figure side is the first special in the normal gaming state. It is shorter than the fluctuation display time on the figure side.

By doing so, while increasing the ball entry rate to the operating port on the side that can substantially proceed during the first probabilistic state and the second probable change state, it is substantially in the first probable change state and the second probable change state. The variable display time of each game on the side that can be progressed can be made shorter than the variable display time of the game times that can be substantially progressed in the normal game state. Therefore, the progress of the game in the first probability change state and the second probability change state becomes smoother.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the operating port on the first special drawing side and the operating port on the second special drawing side are passable gates through which the game ball can pass and then is discharged to the game area PE. FIG. 60A is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 24 in this embodiment. In this embodiment as well, in the same configuration as the other embodiments, the same reference numerals are given and the description of the same configuration will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 60A, the game board 24 of the present embodiment is basically the same as the game board 24 of the third and fourth embodiments. The difference is that the passage type 8th operating port 91 and the 9th operating port 92 are provided at the positions where the 3rd operating port 51 and the 4th operating port 52 are provided, and the 8th operating port is provided. A general winning opening 31 is provided on the downstream side of the 91 and the ninth operating port 92. The eighth operating port 91 is an operating port on the first special drawing side, and when the game ball passes through the eighth operating port 91, the passage is detected by the detection sensor 91a, and the first special drawing is performed by the main control device 81. It is grasped that the winning of the side has occurred. Further, the ninth operating port 92 is an operating port on the second special drawing side, and when the game ball passes through the ninth operating port 92, the passage is detected by the detection sensor 92a, and the main control device 81 detects the passage of the game ball. It is grasped that a prize on the special figure side has occurred.

As shown in FIG. 60B, the eighth operating port 91 is arranged on the upstream side of the ninth operating port 92, and the game ball that has passed through the eighth operating port 91 always passes through the ninth operating port 92. To do. In addition, a game ball that has passed through the ninth operating port 92 always wins a prize in the general winning opening 31 provided on the downstream side of the ninth operating port 92.

For example, as shown in FIG. 61, when a prize is generated in the eighth operating port 91, which is the operating port on the first special drawing side, at the timing of t1, the operating port on the second special drawing side continues at the timing of t2. A prize is generated in a certain ninth operating port 92, and then a prize is generated in the general prize opening 31 at the timing of t3, and a prize ball is paid out accordingly. Further, when a prize is generated in the 8th operating port 91 at the timing of t4, a prize is generated in the 9th operating port 92 at the timing of t5, and then a prize is won in the general winning port 31 at the timing of t6. Will occur, and the prize balls will be paid out accordingly.

The general prize opening 31 is provided to pay out the prize balls associated with the winning of the eighth operating port 91 and the ninth operating port 92. Therefore, unlike the first to fifth embodiments, in the winning process for the operating port (FIG. 16 and the like), the prize balls associated with the winning of the eighth operating port 91 and the ninth operating port 92 are set. I can't. However, the prize ball may be set according to each prize.

Further, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory that changes the winning rate to the operating port is not provided. That is, in this embodiment, the height of the support mode is not provided.

The winning / failing lottery table and the sorting table of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63.

The winning / failing lottery table of this embodiment is basically the same as that of the third to fifth embodiments. As a difference, as shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b), the probability of a special deviation result is set higher than that of the third to fifth embodiments. Therefore, a special deviation result occurs relatively frequently, and the opening / closing execution mode is executed accordingly.

In the distribution table of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), in the distribution table for the first special figure, the 8R normal jackpot result or the 8R is used as the distribution destination of the game result. Probability change jackpot result is set.

The 8R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode of 8 rounds is executed and the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is set to the low probability mode. On the other hand, the 8R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode of 8 rounds is executed and the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is set to the high probability mode. The high-probability mode continues until a predetermined number of game times (for example, 50 times) are executed, or until a normal jackpot result is obtained.

In the distribution table for the second special figure, a 15R normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variation jackpot result is set as the distribution destination of the game result.

The 15R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode of 15 rounds is executed and the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is set to the low probability mode. On the other hand, the 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode of 15 rounds is executed and the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is set to the high probability mode. The high-probability mode continues until a predetermined number of game times (for example, 50 times) are executed, or until a normal jackpot result is obtained.

As for the number of continuations of the high probability mode based on the probability variation jackpot result, for example, a numerical value corresponding to the number of continuations is input to a predetermined counter in the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, and the first special figure and the second special figure are shown. Every time any one of the game rounds is completed, the subtraction process of the predetermined counter is performed. Then, based on the fact that the predetermined counter has reached the initial value (0), the winning / losing lottery mode is set from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

In the distribution table for the first special figure and the distribution table for the second special figure, the ratios to be distributed to the normal jackpot result and the probabilistic jackpot result are both set to be the same ratio.

That is, in the present embodiment, the ratio of the distribution table for the first special figure and the second distribution table set to the high probability mode after the open / close execution mode is the same, but the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode is set. By making them different, the advantages of the distribution table for the first special figure and the distribution table for the second special figure are set to be different. Specifically, the reference to the distribution table for the second special figure is more than the reference to the distribution table for the first special figure because the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode in which the number of rounds is large. It is set to be advantageous for the player in that the prize ball can be obtained.

In addition, when the special deviation result is obtained, either the first special drawing side or the second special drawing side is set to the opening / closing execution mode of one round as in the first to fifth embodiments. The game state is not changed.

Although detailed description by the figure is omitted, in the game state transition process in the present embodiment, when the opening / closing execution mode is started, the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is grasped to obtain the opening / closing execution mode. The process of grasping the number of rounds and inputting a numerical value (any of 1, 8 and 15) corresponding to the round counter RC is executed.

The winning process for the operating port in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The winning process of this embodiment is basically the same as the process of steps S201 to S212. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, the prize ball based on the winning of the eighth operating port 91 or the ninth operating port 92 is not set, but is set based on the winning of the general winning opening 31. Therefore, in the winning process for the operating port of the present embodiment, the processing related to the prize ball (step S202 and step S208) is not performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a prize is won in the ninth operating port 92, counters (reach random number counter C3 and variable type counter CS) other than the counters for winning / failing lottery and distribution determination are not acquired ( Step S3009). Instead, in the following step S3010, referring to the values of the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter CS acquired in step S3004 based on the winning of the eighth operation port 91 immediately before, the ninth operation of this time. A process of storing in the corresponding holding area as a counter based on the winning of the mouth 92 is executed.

That is, in the present embodiment, the winning of the ninth operating port 92 is generated following the winning of the eighth operating port 91, and the counters for winning / failing lottery and the distribution determination are acquired, respectively, while the game A common counter is acquired for the counters C3 and CS regarding the fluctuation display time of the times.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display time table is switched not only in the open / close execution mode based on the jackpot result but also in the open / close execution mode based on the special deviation result.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the variable display time table change process. The variation display time table change process is a process performed as one of the end processes (step S2216) of the open / close execution mode executed when the open / close execution mode is ended in the game state transition process.

In step S3101, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode this time is the opening / closing execution mode based on the normal jackpot result or the probability variation jackpot result. If the open / close execution mode is based on any of the jackpot results, in step S3102, the variation display time table after the end of the open / close execution mode is a table in which the first special figure side is short and the second special figure side is long (for example, FIG. After setting so that the 46 normal game states and the variable display time table in the first high frequency state) are selected, the present change process is terminated.

When a negative determination is made in step S3101, it means that the opening / closing execution mode this time is the opening / closing execution mode based on the special deviation result. In this case, the variation display time on the second special figure side is set to be the same length as the variation display time on the first special figure side over a predetermined period. Specifically, in step S3103, the variation display time table on the second special figure side is changed, for example, the variation on the first special figure side in the variation display time table in the normal game state and the first high frequency state of FIG. Set the display time table to be selected. Then, in step S3104, a process of inputting "30" corresponding to a predetermined period to the short fluctuation counters provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 is executed. The short fluctuation counter is a counter for the MPU 202 to grasp that the fluctuation display time on the second special figure side is the same fluctuation display time as the fluctuation display time on the first special figure side, and is a counter for the second special figure. It is a counter that is decremented by 1 at the end of the game round on the side. After executing the process of step S3104, this change process ends.

The state of progress of the game and the outline of the transition of the game state in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67.

FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b) show the progress of each game in a situation where the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode. Of these, in FIG. 66A, the variation display time is set so that the first special drawing side is short and the second special drawing side is long (a length that cannot be substantially advanced). In this case, although the winning process for the operating port is performed based on the winning of the 8th operating port 91 and the 9th operating port 92, the hold information on the 2nd special drawing side has reached the upper limit of the number of holds. In most cases, the winning / failing lottery on the second special drawing side is not practically carried out. Then, even if the first special drawing side and the second special drawing side win a prize, the winning / failing lottery of only the first special drawing side is substantially performed. In this case, the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/300, and the distribution table for the first special figure is referred to as the distribution table when the jackpot is won.

On the other hand, in FIG. 66 (b), the variation display time of the same length as that of FIG. 66 (a) is set on the first special drawing side, and further, the second special drawing side is also the same as the first special drawing side. The variable display time of the same length is set. In this case, both the game times on the first special figure side and the game times on the second special figure side can be substantially advanced, and the eighth operating port 91 and the ninth operating port 92 are awarded. Based on the above, the winning / failing lottery on the first special drawing side and the winning / failing lottery on the second special drawing side are carried out. Then, although the probability of winning a big hit in each winning or losing lottery is 1/300, the probability of winning a big hit is substantially 150 minutes because the winning or losing lottery is substantially performed twice with one winning. It becomes 1 of. Further, as the distribution table in the case of winning a big hit, the distribution table for the first special figure or the distribution table for the second special figure which is more advantageous to the player is referred to.

FIGS. 66 (c) and 66 (d) show the progress of each game in a situation where the winning / losing lottery mode is the high probability mode. When the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, the probability that both the first special drawing side and the second special drawing side will win the big hit increases to 1/30. Of these, in FIG. 66 (c), since the first special drawing side is short and the second special drawing side is set to have a long variation display time, as in the case of FIG. 66 (a), only the first special drawing side is set. The winning / failing lottery is practically held. Then, the probability of winning the jackpot in this case is 1/30, and the distribution table for the first special figure is referred to as the distribution table when the jackpot is won.

On the other hand, in FIG. 66 (d), the variation display time of the same length as that of FIG. 66 (c) is set on the first special drawing side, and further, the second special drawing side is also the same as the first special drawing side. The variable display time of the same length is set. In this case, both the game times on the first special figure side and the game times on the second special figure side can be substantially advanced, and the eighth operating port 91 and the ninth operating port 92 are awarded. Based on the above, the winning / failing lottery on the first special drawing side and the winning / failing lottery on the second special drawing side are carried out. Then, the jackpot winning probability is substantially 1/15, and the distribution table when the jackpot is won is the distribution table for the first special figure or the second special figure which is more advantageous for the player. The distribution table of is referenced.

With such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 67, it is possible to create a state in which the probability of winning a big hit changes substantially without changing the probability of winning a big hit. That is, in the winning / failing lottery mode being the low probability mode and the game times of only the first special figure side can be substantially advanced (the state of FIG. 66A), the probability of winning the jackpot is substantially 300 minutes. It is 1 of, and it is difficult to win a big hit (non-chance zone).

In this situation, if the variation display time table is switched based on the special deviation result, the variation display time on the second special figure side is set to be a short variation display time, and the game times on the second special figure side. Can be substantially advanced over a predetermined number of times (30 times) (state of FIG. 66 (b)). In this situation, the probability of winning a jackpot is 1/300 each, and although the winning probability itself does not change, the actual winning probability increases to 1/150, which is a jackpot than the above non-chance zone. It becomes easier to win (chance zone).

When the winning / losing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, the probability of winning the jackpot increases to 1/30. The high-probability mode continues over a predetermined number of game times (50 times). In this case, even in a state where the game rounds only on the first special figure side can substantially proceed (the state shown in FIG. 66 (c)), the probability of winning a big hit is substantially 1/30, so comparison is made. It is easy to win a big hit (high probability zone).

On the other hand, in this high probability zone, when the fluctuation display time table is switched based on the special deviation result, the fluctuation display time on the second special figure side is set to be a short fluctuation display time, and the second special figure is set. The game times on the side can be substantially advanced over a predetermined number of times (30 times) (state of FIG. 66 (d)). In this situation, the probability of winning a jackpot is 1/30 each, and although the probability of winning itself does not change, the actual probability of winning increases to 1/15, which is even higher than the above high probability zone. It becomes easy to win a big hit (ultra-high probability zone).

In the variation display of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 on the display screen 42a of the symbol display device 42, the variation display corresponding to the game times on the first special symbol side is basically performed. Then, in the game times that result in a big hit result or a special loss result in the winning / failing lottery on the second special figure side, the variation display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is carried out by the variation display corresponding to the game times on the second special figure side. Will be done.

As described above, if a working port is provided in which the variable display time is set to be long even if winning is possible, and the winning / failing lottery is not substantially performed when the maximum number of holdings is reached, the variable display time is used. By simply switching the table, it is possible to switch between a state in which the winning / failing lottery is not substantially performed and a state in which the winning / failing lottery is substantially performed.

A game ball that has won a prize in the operating port (8th operating port 91) on the 1st special drawing side where the winning / failing lottery is substantially performed, and the operating port (1st) on the 2nd special drawing side where the winning / failing lottery is not substantially performed. 9 By configuring the operating port 92) to win a prize, although the operating ports on the 1st special drawing side and the 2nd special drawing side are duplicated in winning a prize, only one of the 1st special drawing side is actually a winning / failing lottery. Is done. Then, if the variable display time table on the second special drawing side is switched to a table in which the winning / failing lottery is substantially performed, the winning / failing lottery on the first special drawing side and the winning / failing lottery on the second special drawing side are carried out in duplicate. It becomes a state, and it is possible to increase the probability of winning a substantial jackpot without changing the probability of winning or losing lottery.

In particular, although two types of probabilities are set as the probabilities of the winning / failing lottery on the special drawing side, if the above-mentioned case where the winning / failing lottery is performed in duplicate and the case where it is not provided is provided. The odds of winning or losing lottery are substantially doubled to four types, which can greatly contribute to the diversification of games.

By making the switching of the variable display time table a special out-of-order result, even if the game result is a game result in which the probability of winning / failing lottery does not change and the game state is not changed in the past, the actual probability of winning / failing lottery is changed. It is possible to make the game result changeable.

When the first special figure side's distribution table and the second special figure side's distribution table have different advantages for the player, so that the first special figure side's winning / failing lottery is substantially performed. And, in the case where the winning / failing lottery on the second special drawing side is performed, it is possible to make a difference in the advantage for the player only by switching the variable display time.

In the present embodiment, the operating port on the first special drawing side and the operating port on the second special drawing side are configured to generate prizes in an overlapping manner. For example, the operating port on the normal drawing side (through gate 35). ) And the operation port on the special drawing side may be configured to generate a prize in duplicate. A winning or losing lottery on the Fuzu side is executed based on the winning of the operating port on the Fuzu side, and if a winning is won, the game shifts to a state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the predetermined winning part, and the predetermined winning part The prize ball will be obtained when the player wins the prize. FIG. 68 shows a modification that causes duplication of winning / failing lottery.

In FIGS. 68 (a) to 68 (c), in a configuration in which a prize is generated overlapping between the operating port on the special drawing side and the operating port on the normal drawing side, both operations are performed by providing a game that cannot substantially proceed. It shows an example of the pattern of the actual winning probability of the winning / losing lottery based on the mouth.

As shown in FIG. 68 (a), the winning probability of the winning / losing lottery on the special drawing side is set to, for example, 1/300, and the winning probability of the winning / losing lottery on the normal drawing side is set to, for example, 1/100. The variation display time on the special map side is shortened, and the variation display time on the normal map side is lengthened so that only the winning / failing lottery on the special map side can be substantially performed. In this case, the actual winning probability is 1/300. As shown in FIG. 68 (b), the variation display time on the special map side is lengthened and the variation display time on the normal map side is shortened so that only the winning / failing lottery on the normal map side can be substantially performed. In this case, the actual winning probability is 3/300 (1/100). As shown in FIG. 68 (c), if the variation display time on the special drawing side and the normal drawing side is shortened, the winning / failing lottery on both sides is substantially performed. In this case, the actual winning probability is 4/300.

By doing so, even if it is a special figure and a normal figure, the actual winning probability can be obtained by simply switching between the variable display time that can be substantially progressed and the variable display time that cannot be substantially progressed. It becomes possible to change.

In FIGS. 68 (d) to 68 (h), the first special figure, the second special figure, and the ordinary figure are duplicated. For example, in FIG. 68 (d), only the first special figure is a variable display time that can be substantially advanced, and the second special figure and the normal figure are a variable display time that cannot be progressed. The actual winning probability in this case is 1/300. Further, in FIG. 68 (e), the first special figure and the second special figure are set as the variable display time that can be substantially progressed, and the normal figure is set as the variable display time that cannot be progressed. The actual winning probability in this case is 2/300. In FIG. 68 (f), the first special figure and the second special figure are set as the variable display time that cannot be progressed substantially, and the normal figure is set as the variable display time that can be progressed. The actual winning probability in this case is 3/300. In FIG. 68 (g), the first special figure is a variable display time that is substantially impossible to progress, and the second special figure and the normal figure are a variable display time that can be progressed. The actual winning probability in this case is 4/300. Then, in FIG. 68 (h), all of the first special figure, the second special figure, and the normal figure are set as the variable display time that can be substantially advanced. The actual winning probability in this case is 5/300.

In this way, the more actuation ports are overlapped, the more patterns the winning probability is changed by switching the variable display time. As a result, the game can be diversified.

The winning probability of the winning / losing lottery on the general drawing side may be the same as the winning probability of the winning / losing lottery on the special drawing side, or may be lower than that. However, it is preferable that the probability corresponds to the advantage in the case of winning. For example, the privilege obtained when winning in the winning / losing lottery on the special drawing side is won in the winning / losing lottery on the regular drawing side. When there are more benefits than the benefits obtained in the case of, it is preferable that the winning probability of the winning / losing lottery on the special drawing side is lower than the winning probability on the normal drawing side.

In addition, when the operating port on the normal drawing side and the operating port on the special drawing side are arranged side by side, if the operating port on the normal drawing side is provided on the upper side and the operating port on the special drawing side is provided on the lower side, the operating port on the special drawing side is inserted. It can be a type of ball entry portion in which the game ball is not discharged to the game area PE later.

The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. By the way, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or may be partially or wholly applied in combination.

(1) The fluctuation display time shown in each fluctuation display time table (FIGS. 12 to 14, etc.) is an example, and may be different at least within a range that does not deviate from the technical significance of the present invention. That is, for example, in the first and second embodiments, if the variation display time on the second special figure side in the normal gaming state is longer than the variation display time on the first special figure side, it is easy to select. It is often possible to select from a plurality of variable display times instead of uniformly (6000 sec) as in the above embodiment. Then, for example, a part of the plurality may be shorter than the variation display time on the first special drawing side. Further, a time longer than the 6000 sec set in the above embodiment (for example, a game hall business time (14 hours) or more) may be selected. By doing so, it is possible to further deteriorate the digestion efficiency of the second operating port 34 on the advantageous side, and it is possible to increase the significance of performing the game aiming at the lower first operating port 33A in the normal gaming state. .. Further, the time may be shorter than the 6000 sec set in the above embodiment (for example, 600 sec or 300 sec). In this way, the significance of playing a game aimed at the second operating port 34 is increased, which is preferable from the viewpoint of letting the player select the game. However, in order to increase the significance of performing the recommended game (lower first operating port 33A) in the normal game state, for example, the jackpot probability is made lower than that of the above embodiment (for example, 1/400), the second special feature. It is advisable to change the configuration so that the probability of a special deviation result on the drawing side is reduced. Further, it is also possible that the variation display time on the side with good digestion efficiency during the first probability variation state and the second probability variation state is shorter than that of each of the above embodiments (for example, 0.6 sec on average). Good. By doing so, each lottery in the first probability change state and the second probability change state can be executed more efficiently.

Further, in the third to sixth embodiments, the variation display time on the side that can substantially proceed and the variation display time on the side that cannot substantially proceed are not limited to those shown in the above variation display time table. As the variation display time on the side that cannot substantially proceed, a configuration that makes it easy to select a variation display time that is relatively longer than the variation display time on the side that can substantially proceed may be used. For example, a time longer than the 6000 sec set in the above embodiment (for example, a game hall business time (14 hours) or more) may be selected. In this way, the game can be substantially unable to proceed unless a big hit or a special loss result is obtained in the first rotation. Further, the time may be shorter than the 6000 sec set in the above embodiment (for example, 600 sec or 300 sec). In this way, for example, it is possible to avoid an event in which the player wants to leave his / her seat but cannot leave his / her seat because he / she is worried about it because it is changing. However, as shown in the above embodiment, the case where such a long fluctuation display time is set is only the case where the result is out of the ordinary, and even if the player leaves the seat during the fluctuation, It does not lead to the disadvantage of the player. From this point of view, for example, during a fluctuation in which a long fluctuation display time is set, it is clearly notified that the game times are out of the ordinary results (end of fluctuation display). The game result may be notified before the lapse of the variable display time.) In addition, even in these configurations, by forcibly ending the game times on the side that cannot substantially proceed based on the other big hit, etc., it is possible to switch between a state in which the game cannot proceed substantially and a state in which the game can proceed. It can be an opportunity.

About the fluctuation display time on the side that cannot substantially proceed As a relative difference from the fluctuation display time on the side that can substantially proceed, the length is 10 times or more the fluctuation display time on the side that can substantially progress, It is preferable that the length is 100 times or more the variation display time on the substantially progressable side, and more preferably 1000 times or more the variation display time on the substantially progressable side.

(2) In the above embodiment, the lottery system on the first special figure side and the lottery system on the second special figure side are compared, and an advantage / disadvantage difference is provided in the distribution table of the jackpot result. May provide an advantage / disadvantage difference by adding a different configuration or a different configuration. For example, a difference is provided in the number of continuous games in the high-frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode, a difference is provided in the V winning rate (setting rate of the high probability mode), and the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode (the number of prize balls obtained). A configuration such as providing a difference can be considered.

(3) In the first, second, and fifth embodiments, the distribution table on the first special figure side has a 50% probability of a jackpot result in which a V prize can occur, and the distribution table on the second special figure side. In the above, the V prize can be generated regardless of the jackpot result, but at least the V prize occurrence rate (high probability mode setting rate) is higher in the distribution table on the second special figure side. If it is configured, it is possible to increase the probability of going through the second probabilistic state after shifting to the first probabilistic state and before shifting to the normal gaming state.

(4) The special deviation result is set in any of the lottery systems, but in the first and second embodiments, the special deviation result is obtained at least in the first probability variation state (game aiming at the second operating port 34). As long as the payout base is improved, the probability of a special out-of-order result may be different in other gaming states. In addition, the winning / failing lottery table on the first special drawing side may be configured so as not to cause a special deviation result.

In the sixth embodiment, it is sufficient that the table is provided at least on the winning / failing lottery table on the first special drawing side. That is, since the variable display time table is switched due to a special loss result in the winning / failing lottery on the 1st special drawing side, the player shifts to the chance zone or the ultra-high probability zone. Any configuration may be used as long as a special deviation result can occur in the situation where the game is in progress. However, if a special loss result is provided in the winning / failing lottery table on the 2nd special drawing side, there is a possibility that the special drawing result will be obtained in the lottery system on the 2nd special drawing side during the chance zone or the ultra-high probability zone. In this case, the number of chance zones and ultra-high probability zones is reset, which is preferable for the player. By the way, if the probability of a special deviation result is increased, it is advantageous for the player, and if the probability of a special deviation result is decreased, it is disadvantageous for the player.

(5) In the first and second embodiments, one prize ball is paid out based on the winning of the second operating port 34, but it may not be paid out. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to perform a game aiming at the second operating port 34 in the normal game state. In this case, the second operating port 34 may be a passing type ball entry portion such as the through gate 35.

(6) 1st operating port 33, 2nd operating port 34, 3rd operating port 51, 4th operating port 52, 5th operating port 100, 6th operating port 110, 7th operating port 120, 8th operating port 91 , A maximum of four holding information is stored based on the winning of the ninth operating port 92, but the number of holdings that can be stored may be different. Further, the number may be 5 or more and less than 4 in each case. In particular, in the first and second embodiments, if the number of holdings based on the winning of the second operating port 34 is reduced, the balance with the fact that the digestion efficiency on the second operating port 34 side is lowered in the normal gaming state is balanced. Can be secured. That is, for example, if a large amount of hold information is stored on the second operating port 34 side in the normal game state, the variable display time on the second special figure side is set long, so it is difficult to digest the hold information. I can't. Then, although it is possible to reduce the significance of aiming at the second operating port 34, if the reserved information is accumulated, it may be difficult to stop the game against the player's will. Further, in the third to sixth embodiments, the smaller the number of holdable items that can be stored, the more difficult it is to substantially advance the lottery system on the side with the longer variable display time.

(7) The distribution table in each lottery system is set to be uniform regardless of the game state, but a different distribution table may be referred to depending on the game state. For example, in the first, second, and fifth embodiments, as the distribution table on the first special figure side, the distribution table in the normal gaming state is the same as the above, and the high frequency support mode and the high probability As a distribution table of the situation set to the mode (at least in the second probability change state), the jackpot result without V (for example, 50%), the jackpot result with 1st V (for example, 25%), and the jackpot result with 2V (for example, 25%) %) Sorting table. In this case, if the distribution table on the second special drawing side is the same as that of the above embodiment, there is a possibility that the second probability variation state may loop in the second probability variation state, and further diversification of the game is achieved. Can be done. Further, if the distribution table on the first special figure side in the normal game state has the second V and the jackpot result is included, a route for shifting from the normal game state to the second probability change state is generated without going through the first probability change state. Can be made to.

Further, for example, in the third and fourth embodiments, the distribution table in the normal gaming state and the distribution table in the first high-frequency gaming state are particularly different from the distribution table on the first special drawing side. It may be a table. In both the normal game state and the first high frequency state, the first special figure game can proceed, but if different distribution destinations are set depending on the state, it can greatly contribute to the diversification of the game. .. In this case, for example, in the distribution table in the normal game state, the first normal jackpot result and the probability variation jackpot result are set as the distribution destinations, and in the distribution table in the first high frequency state, these distributions are made. The second normal jackpot result should be included in addition to the minutes ahead. In this way, based on the fact that the jackpot is won during the first high frequency state, the winning / losing lottery mode remains in the low probability mode, and the high frequency support mode in which the number of balls held is small is continued. Even if there is, it is possible to cause a case where the progress speed of the game is different. As a result, the intonation of the game is added. Further, the distribution table in the second high frequency state and the distribution table in the probabilistic change state may be different from each other, in particular, the distribution table on the second special drawing side may be used. In both the second high frequency state and the probability change state, the second special figure game can proceed, but if different distribution destinations are set depending on the state, it can greatly contribute to the diversification of the game. In this case, for example, in the distribution table in the probability variation state, the second normal jackpot result and the probability variation jackpot result are set as distribution destinations, and in the distribution table in the second high frequency state, these distributions are made. In addition to the above, the first normal jackpot result is included. In this way, based on the fact that the jackpot is won during the second high frequency state, the winning / losing lottery mode remains in the low probability mode, and the high frequency support mode in which the number of balls held is small is continued. Even if there is, it is possible to cause a case where the progress speed of the game is different. As a result, the intonation of the game is added. In addition, by combining these, as a distribution table in the high frequency state, the same distribution destination (first normal jackpot result, second normal jackpot result, and second special figure side) on the first special figure side and the second special figure side, and It becomes a table in which the probability change jackpot result) is set, and the storage capacity can be reduced by standardizing the table.

(8) The configuration for shifting to the high frequency support mode based on the result of the jackpot with the second V may be configured to shift to the high frequency support mode based on the result of the jackpot without V. In this case, if the high-frequency support mode has a limit on the number of game times (for example, 100 times), the advantage of obtaining a V-less jackpot result is not excessively increased, and the V-less jackpot result is obtained. It is possible to reduce the difference in advantage from the result of a jackpot with V, and to reduce the degree of disappointment when the result of a jackpot without V is obtained. Further, it may be configured to shift to the high frequency support mode based on the result of the big hit with the first V. Further, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to shift at a predetermined ratio in each game result. For example, 50% of the cases where the second probability variation jackpot result is obtained are set to the high frequency support mode, and the remaining 50% are set to the low frequency support mode. In this way, it is possible to further diversify the game.

(9) The change of the selected variable display time table is triggered by the jackpot result, but instead or in addition, any of the following may be triggered. That is, the winning / failing lottery mode switching and the support mode switching are defined by the number of game times, and the winning / losing lottery mode and the support mode are switched by digesting the predetermined number of game times. Then, at the time of switching, the selected variable display time table is also switched. In addition, a game state in which a continuous effect is performed over a predetermined number of game times is set, and the variable display time table is also switched at the transition and the end of the game state.

(10) In the first and second embodiments, the relationship between the branch passages W3 and W4 may be reversed. That is, the left branch passage W4 may be provided with the second operating port 34, and the right branch passage W3 may be guided to the out port 24a. Further, a ball entry portion (for example, a general winning opening 31) through which a game ball can enter is provided in the branch passages W3 and W4 on the side where the second operation port 34 is not provided, and based on the entry into the ball entry portion. However, the structure may be such that a prize ball can be obtained. However, from the viewpoint of not excessively enhancing the superiority in the game aiming at the right side region PE3 in the normal game state, the second operating port 34 is a variable ball entry portion that cannot or is difficult to enter in the normal game state. It is preferable to provide the branch passages W3 and W4 on the side where is not provided so that the ball entry rate to the variable ball entry portion is improved in the first probability variation state. For example, it is conceivable to provide a variable ball entry unit for a special deviation result and a second variable winning device 32B. Further, the branch passages W3 and W4 on the side where the second operating port 34 is not provided are provided with a ball entry portion where a game ball can enter, and the branch passage W3 on the side where the second operating port 34 is not provided is provided. , W4 may be configured to further provide a point for branching the game ball so that the game ball may be distributed to the ball entry portion or may not be distributed to the ball entry portion. Then, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 3 pieces) are paid out based on the entry into the ball entry section, and these entry sections, the variable entry section for the special deviation result, and the second variable winning device 32B It is preferable that the prize ball based on the winning of the prize contributes to the payout base.

(11) In the first and second embodiments, the distribution rate to the branch passages W3 and W4 on the downstream side in the branch passage W2 is set to 50%, but this may be changed. For example, it may be distributed to the second operating port 34 side with a probability higher than 50%, or may be distributed to the second operating port 34 side with a probability lower than 50%.

(12) In the first and second embodiments, a distribution member may be provided in the branch passage W2. The distribution member may have a configuration in which the distribution destination is changed by receiving the own weight of the game ball, or a configuration in which the distribution destination is changed by electric drive. In the latter case, a configuration in which the distribution destination is changed by periodic operation is preferable. In any case, by providing the mechanical distribution member, it is possible to realize the distribution rate (50%) according to the design value more than the distribution by the passage configuration as described above.

(13) In the first and second embodiments, as a configuration in which a distribution member is provided in the branch passage W2, for example, a storage unit capable of storing a plurality of game balls so as not to flow down to the second operating port 34 side is provided. The storage unit can be displaced into a storage state and a non-storage state by operating a predetermined operation unit (for example, an operation unit provided at a position on the front surface of the game machine) of the player. Then, if the non-reservoir state is set by the operation of the player, the ball can be entered into the second operating port 34 side. In this way, if the game ball is stored in the storage unit and the operation unit is operated when it is desired to enter the ball into the second operating port 34, the operation mode of the launch operation device 28 is changed. It is possible to enter the ball into the second operating port 34 first. Therefore, it is possible to realize a faster winning / failing lottery on the second special drawing side. As a configuration in which the storage portion is provided, in the storage state, it is possible to flow down into the branch passages W3 and W4 different from the side where the second operating port 34 is provided, and the ball entry portion shown in (10) is provided at the flow-down destination. It may be configured. In this way, when it is desired to efficiently digest the lottery system on the second special drawing side based on the winning of the second operating port 34, it is operated so as to flow down to the second operating port 34 side as a non-storage state. However, depending on the timing (when the hold has reached the upper limit, during reach, etc.), the game may be enjoyed in which the prize ball is obtained as a storage state.

(14) In the first and second embodiments, the payout base shown in the above embodiment is an example, and may be a payout base higher than 95% or a payout base lower than 95%. It may be configured to be. Further, at least, the payout base on the right first operating port 33B side and the payout base on the second operating port 34 may be the same or substantially the same in the long term, and a temporarily different configuration is also included.

(15) In the lottery system on the 1st special drawing side and the lottery system on the 2nd special drawing side, the variation display of the other is forcibly terminated based on the result of one jackpot, but it is temporarily stopped and opened / closed. It may be configured to restart after the mode ends. The timing of temporarily stopping may be the start of a game round that results in one of the jackpots as in the above embodiment, or the timing of the end of the game round that results in the jackpot (timing at which the variable display ends, confirmation display). Timing to perform) may be used.

(16) In the lottery system on the 1st special drawing side and the lottery system on the 2nd special drawing side, if one is a big hit, the other lottery system is not performed (restricted). Although the lottery is performed in the other lottery system, the lottery may be configured so that the result is usually out of order.

(17) The lottery system on the 1st special drawing side and the lottery system on the 2nd special drawing side are configured to store the 1st winning flag and the 2nd winning flag at the start of fluctuation regardless of the presence or absence of duplication. , The configuration may be such that the game result of the lottery system being executed at the time of duplication occurs is grasped. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load at the start of fluctuation.

(18) In a configuration in which the lottery system on the first special drawing side and the lottery system on the second special drawing side are performed in an overlapping manner, if one is a big hit, the lottery of the other lottery system is not performed, and If the result of the game round in one lottery system is a big hit result, the lottery of the other lottery system is not performed, but at least if there is no period in which the opening / closing execution modes overlap in both lottery systems, There is no inconvenience such as not knowing the opening / closing execution mode by any lottery system. In that respect, for example, during a game in which one lottery system is in a big hit or a big hit result is obtained, a lottery of the other lottery system may be performed and a special loss result may be allowed. Further, at least in both lottery systems, it is sufficient that the game times that result in big hits do not overlap, and the lottery may be performed as in (16), but the result may be missed.

(19) In a configuration in which the lottery system on the first special drawing side and the lottery system on the second special drawing side are performed in an overlapping manner, if a big hit result is obtained in the other lottery system during one game round, the relevant Although the game is forcibly terminated, the timing for forcibly terminating the game is not limited to the above (the timing when the winning or losing lottery that results in a big hit in the other lottery system is performed). For example, it may be the timing when the variable display time of the lottery system on the side where the jackpot result is obtained elapses.

(20) These variable winning devices are separately provided as in the first variable winning device 32A and the second variable winning device 32B, the fourth variable winning device 56 and the fifth variable winning device 57, and the second variable winning device 32B. The V winning rate (setting rate of the high probability mode) is configured to be different depending on whether or not a round is generated by the (fifth variable winning device 57), but this may be realized by one variable winning device. For example, the operation of the shutter 358 is different from the mode in which V prize is likely to occur and the mode in which V prize is less likely to occur, and the opening / closing mode of the distribution member 352 is different without changing the operation of the shutter 358. The configuration may be such that a mode in which a prize is likely to occur and a mode in which a prize is unlikely to occur are realized.

(21) The opening / closing execution mode is performed by the first variable winning device 32A (fourth variable winning device 56) based on the special deviation result, but the second variable winning device 32B (fifth variable winning device) is used. The opening / closing execution mode according to 57) may be performed. In this case, it is advisable to set the operation mode of the shutter 358 so that the V prize does not occur. For example, as a game result, the opening / closing mode is the same as the opening / closing mode in the opening / closing execution mode of the special deviation result, and the operation mode of the shutter 358 in which the V prize is likely to occur is set as the jackpot result (so-called sudden jackpot result or latent probability variation jackpot result). ) Is provided, by making the variable winning devices 32A, 32B, 56, 57 that open and close the same, it becomes difficult to understand the difference between the jackpot result and the special loss result, which can be useful for improving the interest. ..

(22) In the first and second embodiments, the recommended mode of the firing operation may be notified in each of the normal gaming state, the first probability variation state, and the second probability variation state. For example, it is recommended to switch from the first launch operation to the second launch operation when shifting from the normal gaming state to the first probability variation state or the second probability variation state. That is, it is recommended to switch the mode of the firing operation from the mode of firing the left region PE2 so as to flow down (left-handed) to the mode of firing the right region PE3 so as to flow down (right-handed). In this case, for example, by displaying "Aim at the right" on the display screen 42a or the like, the player can grasp that the mode of the firing operation should be switched. As described above, since the open / close execution mode is sandwiched before the transition from the normal game state to the first probability change state or the second probability change state, the game balls are variable winning devices 32A and 32B in the open / close execution mode. It is necessary to switch the mode of launch operation in order to win a prize. Therefore, the switching notification of the mode of the firing operation may be performed based on the jackpot result. In the transition between the first probability change state and the second probability change state, the switching of the recommended firing operation mode does not occur (right-handed hitting is recommended in both cases). When shifting from the first probability change state or the second probability change state to the normal gaming state, it is recommended to switch from the second firing operation to the first firing operation. That is, it is recommended to switch the mode of the firing operation from right-handed to left-handed. In this case, for example, by displaying "Aim at the left" on the display screen 42a or the like, the player can grasp that the mode of the firing operation should be switched. In addition to or instead of the configuration for notifying the mode of these recommended firing operations, the configuration for notifying the firing operation when the firing operation is performed in the mode of the non-recommended firing operation (for example, right-handed). If you hit left in the situation you should hit, "Aim right" is displayed. If you hit right in the situation you should hit left, "Aim left" is displayed.)

(23) In the first, second embodiment and the modified example of the fifth embodiment, in the lottery system on the first special drawing side, the lower first operating port 33A and the right first operating port 33B (fifth operating port). Although the structure is such that the 100 and the sixth operating port 110) are not distinguished from each other, the same lottery system may be used or the structure may be distinguished on the display. For example, the holding images to be displayed in the special figure display areas Ga and Gb may have different configurations. In this case, in the first and second embodiments, the holding image based on the winning of the right first operating port 33B and the holding image based on the winning of the lower first operating port 33A are different from each other, and the right first operating port 33A is different from the holding image. The holding image of the first operating port 33B may be the same as or substantially the same as the holding image of the second operating port 34. In this way, the game aiming at the right first operating port 33B (second probability changing state) and the game aiming at the second operating port 34 (first probability changing state) are switched, but the target operating port is different. Can be made difficult to notice. Further, in this case, the holding image based on the winning of the right first operating port 33B may be displayed in the second special figure display area Gb. As a result, the effect of making it difficult to notice can be further enhanced.

(24) In the first, second, and fifth embodiments, the payout base is the same in the first probability change state and the second probability change state, but in the first probability change state and the second probability change state. Even if the gaming state shifts, the configuration may be such that there is no difference in advantage in receiving the lottery between the lottery system on the first special drawing side and the lottery system on the second special drawing side of the player. For example, each operation is such that the expected degree of winning the right first operating port 33B and the expected degree of winning the second operating port 34 are the same or substantially the same without taking into account the increase in the number of balls held by the prize ball. The winning expectation of the mouths 33B and 34 may be set. By doing so, in a configuration in which one of the prize balls based on the prizes in the operating ports 33B and 34 is 0, or in a configuration in which the prize balls based on the prizes in the operating ports 33B and 34 are the same. Also, the present invention can be applied.

Further, in the third and fourth embodiments, the payout base is the same in the first high frequency state and the second high frequency state, but in the first high frequency state and the second high frequency state. Even if the gaming state shifts, the configuration may be such that there is no difference in advantage in receiving the lottery between the lottery system on the first special drawing side and the lottery system on the second special drawing side of the player.

(25) The transition of the gaming state is performed with the jackpot result as an opportunity. For example, the transition of the gaming state is performed based on the digestion of a predetermined number of game times or the elapse of a predetermined time. Alternatively, the game state may be changed based on the special deviation result.

(26) The game state is changed after the opening / closing execution mode ends, but it may be changed before the opening / closing execution mode is changed or when a V prize is generated. Even in this case, since the lottery of both lottery systems is not performed at least during the open / close execution mode, it is possible to avoid the dispersion of attention due to the lottery being performed during the open / close execution mode. is there.

(27) The opening / closing modes of the variable winning devices 32A, 32B, 55, 56, 57 in the opening / closing execution mode are not limited to those described above. For example, the opening / closing control may be performed a plurality of times in one round. In this case, it is possible to open and close a plurality of times even if the result is a special deviation. At least, a configuration is sufficient in which a plurality of round games can be executed in the open / close execution mode based on the jackpot result, and one round game can be executed in the open / close execution mode based on the special deviation result.

(28) In the first and second embodiments, the arrangement of the variable winning devices 32A and 32B, the right first operating port 33B, and the second operating port 34 is not limited to the above. For example, the second variable winning device 32B may be arranged on the downstream side of the right first operating port 33B and the second operating port 34. Further, the second variable winning device 32B may be provided on the side of the branch passage W2 where the second operating port 34 is not provided (left branch passage W4). Further, from the viewpoint of avoiding the event that the operating ports 33B and 34 are won during the opening / closing execution mode due to the special disconnection result based on the winning of the second operating port 34 in the first probability change state. , Any of the operating ports 33B, 34 may be arranged downstream from the first variable winning device 32A. In this case, the second operating port 34 is a ball entry portion that allows the ball to enter at all times, the right first operating port 33B has a configuration that makes it difficult to enter the ball during the low frequency support mode, and the frequency is low during the opening / closing execution mode. Considering that the support mode is set, it is preferable that the right first operating port 33B is arranged on the upstream side.

Further, in the third to sixth embodiments, all of the operating port on the first special drawing side, the operating port on the second special drawing side, and the variable winning devices 55, 56, 57 are arranged in the lower region PE4. However, these are studded with the upper region PE1, the left region PE2, the right region PE3, and the lower region PE4, and which operating port and the variable winning device are aimed at can be determined by switching the firing mode. It may be arranged so that it can be divided.

(29) In a configuration in which a plurality of lottery systems are executed in parallel, when a game round that results in a big hit is started in one lottery system (when the first winning flag or the second winning flag is stored) or When the game round that triggers the open / close execution mode is started, such as when the game round that results in the special miss is started (when the special miss flag is stored), the start timing (strictly speaking, next) The lottery-type game times on the side different from the side started in the normal processing process times of) are forcibly terminated, and the start of subsequent game times is restricted, but this has been changed as follows. You may. That is, the other game round is forcibly terminated at the timing when the game round that triggers the opening / closing execution mode ends (the timing at which the variable display ends, the timing at which the confirmation display is performed). Then, during the open / close execution mode, the start of the game round is restricted in any lottery system. In this way, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing execution mode from being detected in advance by forcibly terminating the other game. In addition, when the game round that triggers the opening / closing execution mode is started, the other game round is forcibly terminated, and the other game round is allowed to start, but the winning / failing lottery for the game round is forced. The configuration may be such that the result is a deviation (usually a deviation result).

Further, the processing may be different depending on the case where the jackpot result is the trigger and the case where the special deviation result is the trigger as the game round that triggers the opening / closing execution mode. In other words, since there are more benefits (prize balls) obtained between the jackpot result and the special missed result, the game times that result in the other jackpot result based on the start and end of the game times that result in the special missed result. Is not implemented (opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result is not implemented), the player may feel lost. Therefore, when the game round based on the special loss result is started / ended, the other is forcibly terminated, or if the hold information that is the result of the loss is the result of the loss, the hold information is forcibly terminated. If is the one that corresponds to the big hit result, it is better to configure it so that it will not be forcibly terminated. If the result is not forcibly terminated or forcibly removed, the lottery system may be set to stand by. That is, if the game round is being executed, the measurement of the variable display time may be temporarily stopped so as not to end, and if it is before the start of the game round, the hold information is held without starting the game round as in the above embodiment. It is good to prevent it from being digested. The waiting period may be configured to wait until the end of the open / close execution mode based on the special deviation result.

As a configuration for waiting for the progress or start of the game round in order to suppress the duplication of the opening / closing execution modes as described above, at least the duplication of the opening / closing execution modes may be prevented, for example, when the opening / closing execution mode is triggered. Even if the game round starts and ends, the other is advanced and the game waits before the end of the game round. In this way, when the open / close execution mode of the side that triggered the standby ends, the game round of the waiting side ends and the open / close execution mode starts. There is no duplication.

(30) In the above embodiment, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the special deviation result, the opening upper limit period of the first variable winning device 32A, the third variable winning device 55, and the fourth variable winning device 56 is set to 6 sec. A period shorter than that (for example, 1.8 sec) may be set as the open upper limit period. In this way, it becomes more difficult to make the first variable winning device 32A, the third variable winning device 55, and the fourth variable winning device 56 win in the opening / closing execution mode based on the special deviation result, which is lower than that of the above embodiment. In the probability mode, it is possible to make it difficult to receive the winning / losing lottery on the side of the second special figure and to suppress the decrease of the number of balls held by the special deviation result. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to perform the recommended game (in the low probability mode, the game that receives the winning / failing lottery on the first special drawing side).

(31) The mode of variation display between the game times on the first special figure side and the game times on the second special figure side is not limited to the above. For example, a display screen for executing the game times on the first special figure side and a display screen for executing the game times on the second special figure side may be provided, and variable display may be executed on each display screen. .. Further, the display area of the game times on the first special drawing side and the display area of the game times on the second special drawing side of one display screen may be divided and displayed. In any case, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the game times corresponding to the currently recommended game are highlighted. For example, if the configuration is such that each display screen is provided, the display screen corresponding to the recommended game is displayed. A configuration in which the display screen on the recommended game side is placed in a prominent position (upper or front) and the display screen on the non-recommended game side is placed in an inconspicuous position (lower or rear) by highlighting or making each display screen movable. It is good to say.

(32) In the game times on the first special figure side and the game times on the second special figure side, the side corresponding to the recommended game is configured to be variablely displayed by the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Alternatively, or instead, when an unrecommended game is being performed (for example, the second launch mode is used in the normal game state, or the first launch mode is used in the first and second probability change states), the method of hitting is instructed. It may be configured to give instructions and notifications. That is, if the game is being played in the second launch mode in the normal game state, a notification "Please return to left-handed" is given, and the game is being played in the first launch mode in the first and second probability variation states. For example, you should notify "Please hit right". Further, this instruction notification may be configured to notify even when the game state is changed (when the firing mode needs to be changed).

(33) The variation display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the side corresponding to the recommended game is switched between the game times on the first special figure side and the game times on the second special figure side at the time of transition of the game state. Although it is configured, for example, it may be configured to be performed during a big hit. In this way, the player can grasp that the firing mode should be changed without waiting for the end of the jackpot, and can prepare for it. However, as an effect during the jackpot, a promotion effect (for example, the content that was notified as the result of the jackpot without V is re-notified as the result of the jackpot with the first V, etc., is notified first of the unfavorable result for the player, and then. When performing an effect as if it was changed to a preferable side), there is a possibility that the player may realize that the promotion effect cannot occur by instructing the change of the firing mode. In that respect, a configuration in which the variable display is switched at the end of the jackpot is preferable from the viewpoint of enjoying the jackpot effect until the end.

(34) The payout base of the first probabilistic state and the second probabilistic state and the first high frequency state and the second high frequency state are all about 95%, but the payout base of these probable change states (high frequency state). May be higher or lower than 95% if they are the same or substantially the same.

(35) In the first and second embodiments, the game is realized in which the payout base is the same or substantially the same in the first probability change state and the second probability change state, and the game state is changed, but the payout bases are different from each other. You may. That is, when the cycle of shifting from the normal gaming state to the second probability changing state through the first probability changing state and shifting from the second probability changing state to the normal gaming state is taken into consideration, the next jackpot is one of the V-shaped jackpot results. The first probability change state is the most advantageous situation for the player, and the second probability change state in which the next jackpot may be the result of the jackpot without V is more disadvantageous to the player than the first probability change state. I can say. Therefore, for example, if the payout base is set to be higher in the second probability change state than in the first probability change state, it is possible to compensate for the above-mentioned advantage by the payout base. Then, in each probability variation state, it is possible to match the advantage of taking into account the ball launch based on the jackpot result and the ball launch associated therewith. On the contrary, if the payout base in the first probability change state is made higher than that in the second probability change state, it is possible to further enhance the superiority in the first probability change state, and it is possible to add intonation of the game.

(36) In the third and fourth embodiments, in the forced termination process of step S2506, the other variable display is forcibly terminated, but it is not forcibly terminated and is based on the passage of the variable display time. It may be configured to end the variable display.

(37) In the third and fourth embodiments, if the probability variation jackpot result is obtained, the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode (second high frequency support mode) are continued until the next jackpot result is obtained. , The high-probability mode, the high-frequency support mode, or one of the high-probability modes may be terminated based on the predetermined number of game times.

(38) The high-frequency frequency counter in the third and fourth embodiments and the short-variable counter in the sixth embodiment are subtracted each time one of the game rounds is completed. It may be configured to be subtracted even when finished. By doing so, it is not necessary for the main control device 81 to determine which game round is actually progressing at present, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

(39) In the third and fourth embodiments, the opening / closing mode of the electric accessory 52a and the frequency of the support lottery are the same in the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode. , At least one of the opening / closing mode of the electric accessory 52a, the frequency of the support lottery, and the probability of winning the support may be different in each support mode. In this way, the gaming state can be made more diverse.

(40) As in the first high-frequency support mode in the third and fourth embodiments, a state in which the game times on a side different from the side on which the electric accessory 52a facilitates ball entry progresses is a normal game state. May be. That is, from the viewpoint that the first high-frequency support mode assists the holding ball for advancing the game round on the first special drawing side, the assisting the holding ball may be performed in the normal gaming state. In this case, in order to secure the superiority of the other high-frequency support modes, the opening / closing mode of the electric accessory 52a in the first high-frequency support mode, the frequency of the support lottery, and the probability of winning the support as in (39). At least one of them may be configured to be more disadvantageous to the player than the other high frequency support modes.

(41) In the third to sixth embodiments, 6000 sec is uniformly set as the fluctuation display time on the side that cannot substantially proceed at the time of normal deviation, and 10 sec is set at the time of big hit or special deviation. The variable display time may be changed based on the subsequent pending information. For example, from the viewpoint that it is sufficient that the game times that are normally out of order continue for a long time as a configuration that cannot be substantially progressed, the first hold information sets a long variable display time, and the subsequent game times are set. The hold information may be configured such that a variable display time that can be substantially advanced is set. In this way, when the side that cannot substantially proceed is changed to the side that can substantially proceed by switching the game state, etc., if the changing game times are forcibly terminated, etc., the subsequent pending information will be renewed. There is no need to set a short variable display time.

Furthermore, based on the acquisition of the subsequent pending information, the game times that are changing and cannot be substantially advanced are forcibly terminated (the variation display time is forcibly shortened, etc.), and the relevant game is terminated. The acquired pending information may be configured to start a new game round that cannot be substantially progressed. In this way, it is possible to make it meaningful to newly acquire the pending information while making the configuration substantially impossible to proceed as long as the game times of the normal deviation result are continuous.

Further, as the variable display time that cannot be substantially progressed, the variable display time (for example,) having a length equal to or greater than the product of the average time of the variable display time that can be substantially progressed and the number of executions of the substantially progressable game times If the average time of the variable display time that can be substantially progressed is 20 sec and the upper limit of the number of continuous games that can be substantially progressed is 50, the variable display time having a length of 1000 sec or more) is set. May be. In this case, as described above, the variable display time having a length equal to or longer than the product may be set for one hold information, or the variable display time having a length equal to or longer than the product may be allocated and set for a plurality of hold information. It may be configured to be used. When allocating with a plurality of hold information, each hold information stored at the timing set on the side that cannot substantially proceed (assuming that the side that can substantially proceed is set at the same timing) is the product of the above. It is preferable to allocate the variable display time of the above length.

Furthermore, in a situation where the game round of the side that cannot substantially proceed is executed, if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result or the special loss result is acquired as the subsequent hold information of the side that cannot substantially proceed, the change occurs. Forcibly end the game times in the game (forcibly shorten the variable display time, etc.), and for the hold information that is digested before the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result or special miss result. May be configured to set a variable display time that can be substantially advanced. In this way, even though the stored hold information includes the hold information of the jackpot result and the special miss result, the game times of the normal miss result are carried out for a long time, and the jackpot result and the special miss It is possible to eliminate the inconvenience of not being able to shift to the open / close execution mode based on the result.

(42) The player can identify the effect of the game times by the display screen 42a or the like executed in the first probability change state and the effect of the game times by the display screen 42a or the like executed in the second probability change state. The production contents may be different from each other, or the same or substantially the same production contents may be used so that the player cannot easily identify or cannot identify them. Further, the player can identify the effect of the game times by the display screen 42a or the like executed in the first high frequency state and the effect of the game times by the display screen 42a or the like executed in the second high frequency state. The production contents may be different as described above, or the same or substantially the same production contents may be used so that the player cannot easily identify or cannot identify them.

The first probability variation state is a state in which at least two more jackpot results occur, and the second probability variation state is a state in which the probability variation state can end at the next jackpot result. Therefore, for example, in the first probabilistic state, the predetermined character is laid down on the beach, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner. For example, in the second probabilistic state, the predetermined character is attacked by a shark at sea. If these states have different production contents, such as by displaying the fluctuations of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 against the background of the situation, the player feels a sense of security in the first probability change state and a feeling of excitement in the second probability change state. It is also possible to produce the contents according to. On the other hand, if the same effect content is used, the storage capacity for storing the effect data can be reduced, and it is possible to provide a feeling of excitement such as not knowing when the probability change state will end.

In addition, both the first high-frequency state and the second high-frequency state are in the low-probability mode, and the end conditions are all based on the fact that the game times have been digested 100 times, but the game has substantially progressed. The game being played is the first special figure game in the first high frequency state, while it is the second special figure game in the second high frequency state, and the digestion speed is also the second high frequency state than the first high frequency state. Is faster. Therefore, due to these differences, in the first high-frequency state, for example, if a predetermined character is immersed in a hot spring and relaxed, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner, the number of balls held is not reduced. It is easy for the player to imagine a state in which the game can proceed in a relaxed manner, and in the second high frequency state, for example, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner against the background of a predetermined character sprinting at full speed. Then, it is possible to produce a sprinting feeling according to the fast game progress speed.

(43) The combination of symbols to be stopped in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in the game round to shift to the open / close execution mode is not limited to the above. For example, in the first, second, and fifth embodiments, if the game result shifts to the high frequency support mode (the result of the jackpot with the second V), the combination of odd-numbered symbols is stopped, and the game shifts to the low frequency support mode. In the case of the result (big hit result without V, big hit result with 1st V), the even-numbered symbols are stopped. For example, even if the game result is the same, the combination of symbols to be stopped may be different depending on the game state. Specifically, in the normal game state, if the transition of the winning / losing lottery mode is unlikely to occur (V winning is unlikely to occur) and the jackpot result (big hit result without V), the combination of even-numbered symbols is stopped and the first probability change If the game result is easy to shift to the state (the result of the jackpot with the first V), the combination of odd-numbered symbols is stopped. Further, in the first probability variation state, in the case of the jackpot result in which the first probability variation state loops (the jackpot result with the first V), the combination of odd-numbered symbols is stopped and the jackpot result (with the second V) shifts to the second probability variation state. In the case of a jackpot result), the combination of even-numbered symbols is stopped. Then, in the case of a game result that shifts to the first probability variation state in the second probability variation state (big hit result with the first V), the combination of odd-numbered symbols is stopped and the jackpot result that shifts to the normal game state (big hit result without V). In the case of, the combination of even-numbered symbols is stopped. In this way, if the odd-numbered symbol is stopped and displayed, the impression that the probabilistic state loops twice after that can be strengthened.

In the configuration in which the probability change state, the first high frequency state, and the second high frequency state are set in addition to the normal gaming state as in the third and fourth embodiments, the probability change jackpot result of shifting to the probability change state If so, the combination of odd-numbered symbols is stopped, and if it is the first normal jackpot result among the normal jackpot results, the combination of symbols corresponding to the transition to the first high-frequency state (for example, 2, 4, of even-numbered symbols) (8 symbol combinations) is stopped, and if it is the 2nd normal jackpot result of the normal jackpot results, the symbol combination corresponding to the transition to the 2nd high frequency state (for example, the combination of 6 symbols out of the even numbered symbols) is Stop it. In this way, it is possible to give a strong impression that the first high frequency state and the second high frequency state are different gaming states.

Further, as in the sixth embodiment, in the case of a special deviation result that triggers the switching of the variable display time table, a specific symbol combination different from the case of the jackpot result (for example, a combination of 3.4.1 symbols). ) Is stopped. As a result, the player can more clearly grasp that the subsequent gaming state shifts to the chance zone or the ultra-high probability zone.

(44) As a kind of jackpot result, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. Probability variation jackpot result (unspecified high probability correspondence) The result of the game or the result of the latent probability change state) may be included. In this case, assuming that the opening / closing mode of the variable winning device in the opening / closing execution mode and the effect on the display screen 42a and the like are the same as or substantially the same as those of the special deviation result, it is apparently based on either the jackpot result or the special deviation result. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the open / close execution mode has been performed. In particular, as in the sixth embodiment, in the configuration in which the player shifts to the chance zone when a special out-of-game result occurs in the normal game state, is the player shifted to the chance zone (state of 1/150 winning probability) after the open / close execution mode? Alternatively, it is possible to play a game in which a high probability mode (a state of a winning probability of 1/30) is predicted. Furthermore, it is a game result of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in which these opening / closing modes and effects are visually the same or substantially the same, such as switching the variable display time table (shifting to the chance zone) and setting to the high probability mode. May be provided as a game result in which is not performed. In this way, not only whether the player has moved to the chance zone or the high-probability mode after the open / close execution mode, but also the game state may not have changed (it remains in the low-probability mode). The number of branches will increase and the game will be diversified.

(45) In the third and fourth embodiments, the electric accessory 52a is provided in the fourth operating port 52, but it may be provided in the third operating port 51 side. Further, a different operating port (the operating port on the first special drawing side or the operating port on the second special drawing side) may be separately provided, and the electric accessory 52a may be provided for the operating port. Even in these cases, if the variable display time of the game times of the operating port in the state where the electric accessory 52a is opened frequently is set to a long variable display time, the hold information based on the winning of the operating port can be obtained. It is possible to create a state in which the upper limit number is easily reached and it is practically difficult to perform a winning / failing lottery based on winning a prize in the operating port.

(46) In each of the above embodiments, the description has been made on the premise that the game times on the first special figure side and the game times on the second special figure side are carried out in parallel, but these are not carried out in parallel. It may be configured. Specifically, the winning timing is the operation port on the first special figure side → the operation port on the second special figure side → the operation port on the first special figure side → the operation port on the second special figure side, and these prizes are When it occurs during one game (stored as hold information), the first special figure side game times → the second special figure side game times → the second special figure side game times → the first special figure side There is a superiority or inferiority between the priority side and the non-priority side in the digestion order, such as the game times of. (In this example, the second special figure side is digested earlier than the first special figure side even if the winning timing is later. It may be configured. In this way, if there is at least superiority or inferiority in the digestion order, the special figure on the side that is substantially impossible to proceed is postponed as the special figure on the non-priority side, for example, as in the third to fifth embodiments. It is preferable that the configuration is set to. Specifically, for example, in the third embodiment, the game on the first special figure side can substantially proceed in the first high frequency support mode, and the game on the second special figure side does not substantially progress. In order to make it possible, the second special drawing side may be the non-priority side. In this case, if the reserved information exists on both the 1st special drawing side and the 2nd special drawing side, the reserved information on the 1st special drawing side is preferentially digested and the 2nd special drawing side (winning prize). If only the hold information on the easy side) exists, the hold information on the second special figure side is digested. However, since the variation display time of the game times related to the hold information on the second special figure side is long, there is a high possibility that a plurality of hold information on the first special figure side will be acquired during that time, and from the next time onward. The game times are likely to be the game times on the first special drawing side. In this way, the game on the side of the first special drawing, which is difficult to win, is given priority.

Further, in a configuration in which winnings are duplicated as in the sixth embodiment, for example, if the first special drawing side is given priority and the second special drawing side is given non-priority, the reserved information on the second special drawing side is given. If it is acquired, the first special figure side is also acquired, so as long as a prize is generated, only the first special figure side will proceed in the non-chance zone (high probability zone). Then, after all the reserved information on the first special drawing side is digested, the reserved information on the second special drawing side is digested, but the variable display time of the game times related to this reserved information is long. Therefore, there is a high possibility that a plurality of reserved information will be acquired during that time, and the next and subsequent game times are likely to be the game times on the first special drawing side. In addition, in the case of shifting to the chance zone (ultra-high probability zone), if the reserved information on the first special figure side disappears, the reserved information on the second special figure side will be digested in a relatively short time, which is inconvenient. Does not occur.

As described above, when each game round is executed separately, the running game round is forcibly terminated based on the acquisition of the priority side hold information during the execution of the non-priority side game round. It may be configured to be used. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the game cannot be substantially advanced until the game round on the non-priority side is completed. In addition, when forcibly ending, for example, if it is a normal out-of-game result, it is forcibly ended, and if it is a big hit result or a special out-of-game result, it waits until the end of the variable display time according to the game result of the game times. It is good to do. This is because if the game result is forcibly terminated even though it is a big hit result or a special off result, the player may feel distrust.

(47) In the modified example of the fifth embodiment, the distribution member 133 is configured to be alternately (one-to-one) distributed to the sixth operating port 110 and the seventh operating port 120. It may be configured so that it can be easily distributed to.

(48) In the sixth embodiment, the game balls that have won a prize in one operating port are always won in another operating port, but a predetermined percentage of the game balls that have won in one operating port are It may be configured to win a prize in another operating port. In this case, for example, if one of the game balls that have won a prize in one operating port is configured to win a prize in another operating port at a rate of one in two, when a winning in one operating port occurs, one in every two times. Winnings to other operating ports will also occur, and the winning / failing lottery based on the winning of the one operating port will be held twice as many times as the winning / failing lottery based on the winning of the other operating openings. Then, it is possible to make a difference between the probability of winning / failing lottery based on the winning of one operating port and the probability of winning / failing lottery based on the winning of another operating port from the viewpoint of the occurrence rate of duplication. By doing so, in a configuration in which the variable display time that can be substantially progressed and the variable display time that cannot be substantially progressed are switched, the pattern of the substantial winning probability can be changed. It will be possible to make it more diverse.

(49) The number of prize balls based on the winning of each operating port is an example, and the number of prize balls may be different from the above. For example, the number of prize balls in the operating port on the first special drawing side is not limited to three, and may be two or less, or four or more. Further, the number of prize balls in the operating port on the second special drawing side is not limited to one, and may be two or more (four or more).

(50) In the third to sixth embodiments, as a configuration in which an upper limit is set for the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode or the like, the variable display time table is switched when the upper limit of the number of continuations is reached. The configuration may be such that the variable display time table is not switched without going through the execution mode. In this way, switching between the side that cannot substantially proceed and the side that can substantially proceed does not occur without going through the open / close execution mode, which is a situation in which the game rotations of both special figures are not performed. It is possible to make it easier to understand the progress of the game in which both special figures are performed in parallel.

(51) The opening / closing execution mode based on the special deviation result may be executed in an opening / closing mode in which a prize is not substantially generated in the large winning opening 55a. In this case, it is preferable that the length of the period during which the third variable winning device 55 is opened is shorter than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball. In particular, in the sixth embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode based on the special deviation result not only assists the holding ball but also serves as an opportunity to switch the variable display time table. Therefore, even if the above is performed, at least It is possible to use it as an opportunity to switch to the chance mode or the ultra-high probability mode as an opportunity to switch the variable display time table.

(52) In the sixth embodiment, the game times on the second special figure side cannot be substantially advanced in the normal state, but the game times on the first special figure side may not be substantially progressable. , The side that cannot substantially proceed may be switched due to a special deviation result or the like. Although the jackpot winning probability in the winning / losing lottery table is the same between the game times on the first special drawing side and the game times on the second special drawing side, the advantages of the distribution table are different. Therefore, even in the sixth embodiment, it can be said that it is significant that the game times that can be substantially advanced are switched between the first special drawing side and the second special drawing side.

(53) The probability of winning a big hit is the same for the winning / losing lottery table on the 1st special drawing side and the winning / losing lottery table on the 2nd special drawing side, but the 1st special drawing side is easier to win the big hit or the first 2 The winning probability may be different, such as the special figure side being easier to win the big hit.

(54) When the changing game times are forcibly terminated due to the convenience of the other lottery system, the remaining fluctuation display time is set to 0, but the remaining fluctuation display time is set to a predetermined residual time (for example, 1 sec). Then, in the predetermined remaining time, the game result of the game times of the forced termination side may be notified (confirmed display is performed).

(55) Another type of pachinko machine different from the above embodiment, for example, a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to pachinko machines that generate a right when they enter and become a big hit, pachinko machines equipped with other accessories, arrange ball machines, and game machines such as sparrow balls.

<About the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

In addition, in each of the following inventions, "as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion provided in the game area, and the winning result is obtained in the lottery. In this case, it is known that the player shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1). ”Regarding the background technique,“ Here, from the viewpoint of increasing the degree of attention to the game, There is still room for improvement. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward the game area (game area PE), and
A first ball entry section (lower first operating port 33A or right first operating port 33B) and a second ball entry section (second operating port 34) provided in the game area and on which a game ball can enter are
A first lottery means (first by the main control device 81) for performing a first lottery as to whether or not to shift the game state to a state advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering the first ball entry unit. 1 Function to execute the pass / fail judgment process for special figures) and
A second lottery means (second by the main control device 81) for performing a second lottery as to whether or not to shift the gaming state to a state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry unit. 2 Function to execute the pass / fail judgment process for special figures) and
Based on the lottery by the first lottery means, the first display unit (first special figure display unit 37a) starts the change display of the pattern, and displays the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means. 1 Display control means (a function of executing the first game times control process in the main control device 81) and
Based on the lottery by the second lottery means, the second display unit (second special figure display unit 37b) starts the change display of the pattern, and displays the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the second lottery means. 2 display control means (a function of executing the second game time control process in the main control device 81) and
With
It is easy to set the gaming state to a period in which the first display period in which the pattern change display is performed in the first display unit is shorter than the second display period in which the pattern change display is performed in the second display unit. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with means for setting a first gaming state (normal gaming state, second probability changing state).

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which different lottery is performed depending on the ball entry section, different playability such as a short / long period until the result is notified depending on which entry section the ball is entered is realized. can do. More specifically, at least in the first gaming state, the result is notified earlier when the ball is entered into the first entry section than when the ball is entered into the second entry section (a short period is set). Therefore, it is considered that it is easier for the player to quickly shift to an advantageous state by entering the ball into the first ball entry section. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned first game state, it can be viewed that the period for enjoying the change display of whether or not the ball enters the second ball entry portion shifts to an advantageous state becomes longer. For a player who is looking forward to the game, it is preferable to enter the ball into the second ball entry section. With such a configuration, for example, by providing a difference in the ball entry rate between the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section and the advantage of the advantageous state, the difference between the ball entry portions is further increased. It is also possible, and it will be possible to greatly contribute to the diversification of games. In other words, it is possible to further diversify the game by not only making the advantage of each ball entry part different such as the ball entry rate and the advantage, but also by combining the time element of the digestion speed. ..

Feature A2. The probability that the lottery result by the first lottery means will be the first transition correspondence result (the first V present jackpot result that may shift to the high probability mode) corresponding to the transition to the advantageous state for the player, and Second transition correspondence result corresponding to the transition of the lottery result by the second lottery means to a state advantageous to the player (first V with jackpot result or second V with jackpot result with possibility of shifting to high probability mode) The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the probability of becoming is set to a different probability.

According to the above configuration, not only the digestion speed is different depending on the ball entry part to be entered, but also the winning probability of the lottery (first lottery / second lottery) performed based on the entry is made different. It is possible to further diversify the game. For example, if the winning probability of the first lottery is higher than the winning probability of the second lottery, the result will be notified earlier when the ball is entered into the first entry section than when the ball is entered into the second entry section ( Not only (quickly shifts to an advantageous state), but also the probability of shifting to the advantageous state increases, so that the first ball entry portion side can basically be advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the winning probability of the second lottery is higher, the result will be notified later if the ball is entered into the second entry section, but the probability of shifting to an advantageous state will be higher, so the change display will be performed. Depending on the situation of the player, the second ball entry section may be more advantageous in relation to the period.

Feature A3. It is determined that the probability that the lottery result by the second lottery means will be the result of the second transition is higher than the probability that the lottery result by the first lottery means will be the result of the first transition. The gaming machine according to the feature A2.

In general, it is considered preferable for the ball entry part, which is advantageous for the player, to increase the digestion speed so that the player can receive the maximum benefit thereof. However, if this is done, the advantage for the player becomes too high, or the difference from the other ball entry section (the entry section on the non-advantageous side) becomes too large, and the player enters the other entry section. It may interfere with the game of making a ball (for example, a decrease in attention). Therefore, if the digestion rate of the ball entry portion on the advantageous side is slowed down as in the above configuration, the advantage of one ball entry section is not excessively increased in relation to the digestion rate, and both ball entry sections are used. It becomes possible to balance.

Feature A4. The feature A1 to A3, wherein the gaming state is provided with a means for setting the second display period to a second gaming state (first probability variation state) in which the second display period is easily set to a period shorter than the first display period. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the above configuration, the digestion rate of each entry portion is reversed between the first gaming state and the second gaming state. In this way, the relationship between the ball entry portions described in the feature A1 can be enjoyed by switching the gaming state.

Feature A5. A gaming state transition means that shifts the gaming state to the first gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition, and shifts the gaming state to the second gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition ( The gaming machine according to feature A4, which comprises a function of executing a gaming state transition process by the main control device 81).

According to the above configuration, the effect described in the feature A4, that is, the switching of the ball entry portion having a fast / slow digestion speed by switching the gaming state occurs based on the satisfaction of each condition. By doing so, it is possible to add intonation to the game. That is, for example, if one of the ball entry parts is in a more advantageous state for the player in relation to the digestion speed of each ball entry part and the profit obtained, the more the state continues, the more the player as a player. Profitable and preferable. However, in the case of a gaming machine in which such a situation is likely to occur, the player's interest in the game may decrease if the situation does not occur in relation to the ball output rate.

Feature A6. The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein at least one of the first condition and the second condition is established by shifting to a state advantageous to the player.

According to the above configuration, based on the results of the first lottery and the second lottery, not only the player shifts to a state advantageous to the player, but also the game state is switched (switching of the ball entry portions having different digestion speeds). .. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game by using the relationship between the different lottery (first lottery / second lottery) based on each entry part and the entry part having different digestion speeds. It will be possible.

Feature A7. The feature A6 is characterized in that at least one of the first condition and the second condition is established based on the transition to a state advantageous to the player and the termination of the state. A game machine.

According to the above configuration, the player can first enjoy the advantageous state, and for example, the player can fully enjoy the advantageous state by first switching the ball entry portions having different digestion speeds. It does not lead to overwhelming results such as not being able to do it.

Feature A8. Variable ball entry means (variable winning devices 32A, 32B) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which a game ball is less likely to enter than the open state.
A switching control executing means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for executing unit switching control for switching the variable ball entry means from the closed state to the open state and then switching to the closed state.
A privilege granting means (payout control device 77) that grants a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means, and
With
The advantageous state for the player is a state in which the specific switching control (round game) in which the unit switching control is executed a predetermined number of times is set as a predetermined state in which the unit switching control can be executed a plurality of times.
As a result of the first lottery or the second lottery, a special result (special deviation result) in which the specific switching control can be executed only once is set.
A function of executing a gaming state transition process by the main control device 81 (a function of limiting the transition to the first gaming state or the second gaming state when the specific switching control is performed based on the special result). ), The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A7.

According to the above configuration, if the result is that a large number of benefits will be given (result of performing a plurality of specific switching controls), the digestion speed is switched between fast and slow by switching the gaming state. On the other hand, if it is a specific result (a result in which the specific switching control is performed only once) that the privilege obtained is less than that, the switching of the game state is not performed. In this way, for example, it is possible to avoid an event in which a player stays in an advantageous state but shifts to an unfavorable state without a sufficient number of balls (privileges). .. Further, assuming that the player is staying in an unfavorable gaming state and is waiting for a transition to an advantageous gaming state, it may be preferable for the player to increase the probability of transition to the advantageous gaming state. However, the balance of the ball output may become unbalanced. Therefore, if the probability of a specific result is increased in such a situation, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the number of balls held by frequently performing the specific switching control even if the game state does not shift to an advantageous state. It becomes. As described above, by using the above configuration, it is possible to create a wide variety of games.

The above configuration may be expressed as follows.
"Variable ball entry means (variable winning devices 32A, 32B) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which a game ball is less likely to enter than the open state. ,
A switching control executing means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for executing switching control between the closed state and the open state of the variable ball entering means, and
A privilege granting means (payout control device 77) that grants a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means, and
With
The advantageous state for the player is set as a state in which a predetermined round game in which switching control is performed by the switching control executing means can be executed a predetermined number of times.
As a result of the first lottery or the second lottery, a special result (special deviation result) is set so that a predetermined switching control by the switching control executing means can be executed.
When the predetermined switching control based on the special result is performed, the limiting means for restricting the transition to the first gaming state or the second gaming state (the gaming state transition process by the main control device 81 is executed). The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A7, which is characterized by having a function). "
Feature A9. It has a plurality of first ball-entry portions, and one of the plurality of first ball-entry portions is in a state where the ball-entry rate to the first ball-entry portion is improved. A changing means (electric accessory 331) that can be changed to a state in which the ball ratio is lowered is provided.
In the game area, the first ball entry unit is provided in a region reached when the launching means is operated in the first launch operation mode, and the other first ball entry unit is the first launch operation. Features A1 to A1 to be characterized in that it is provided in a region that cannot be reached when operated in the mode and is reachable when operated in a second launch operation mode different from the first launch operation mode. The gaming machine according to any one of A8.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the first ball entry section is provided in which the digestion speed is faster than that of the second ball entry section in the first game state, the ball entry rate changes as the first ball entry section. Some are provided and some are unchanged. Then, these first ball entry portions are arranged at positions that cannot be aimed unless the firing operation mode is different. If the ball entry rate is improved by the changing means, the first ball entry portion on that side should be aimed at, and if the ball entry rate is decreased by the changing means, the changing means is provided. It is thought that we should aim at the side that does not. In this way, it is possible to contribute to further diversification of games.

Feature A10. The first lottery and the second lottery are executed independently of each other, and the change display of the pattern on the second display unit is performed in the situation where the change display of the pattern is performed on the first display unit. It is possible to start the change display of the pattern in the first display unit in a situation where the change display of the pattern is performed in the second display unit. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A9.

According to the above configuration, the first lottery and the second lottery having different digestion speeds are carried out in parallel. Therefore, for example, the side with a high digestion speed (the first lottery side in the first game state) while displaying one change on the side with a slow digestion speed (the second lottery side in the first game state). It is also possible to realize a game in which the change display of is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to create various games by using a plurality of lottery systems having different digestion speeds.

Feature A11. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward the game area (game area PE), and
A first ball entry section (lower first operating port 33A or right first operating port 33B) and a second ball entry section (second operating port 34) provided in the game area and on which a game ball can enter are
A first lottery means (by the main control device 81) for performing a first lottery as to whether or not to shift the game state to a specific state advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering the first ball entry unit. Function to execute the hit / fail judgment process for the first special figure) and
A second lottery means for performing a second lottery as to whether or not to shift to the specific state based on the game ball entering the second entry portion (whether or not the second special drawing by the main control device 81 is successful). Function to execute judgment processing) and
A transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of transitioning to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player after the specific state, and
Based on the lottery by the first lottery means, the first display unit (first special figure display unit 37a) starts the change display of the pattern, and displays the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means. 1 Display control means (a function of executing the first game times control process in the main control device 81) and
Based on the lottery by the second lottery means, the second display unit (second special figure display unit 37b) starts the change display of the pattern, and displays the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the second lottery means. 2 display control means (a function of executing the second game time control process in the main control device 81) and
It is easy to set the gaming state to a period in which the first display period in which the pattern change display is performed in the first display unit is shorter than the second display period in which the pattern change display is performed in the second display unit. Means for setting the first game state (normal game state, second probability change state) and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which different lottery is performed depending on the ball entry section, different playability such as a short / long period until the result is notified depending on which entry section the ball is entered is realized. can do. More specifically, at least in the first gaming state, the result is notified earlier when the ball is entered into the first entry section than when the ball is entered into the second entry section (a short period is set). Therefore, it is considered that it is easier for the player to quickly shift to an advantageous state by entering the ball into the first ball entry section. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned first game state, it can be viewed that the period for enjoying the change display of whether or not the ball enters the second ball entry portion shifts to an advantageous state becomes longer. For a player who is looking forward to the game, it is preferable to enter the ball into the second ball entry section. With such a configuration, for example, by providing a difference in the ball entry rate between the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section and the advantage of the advantageous state, the difference between the ball entry portions is further increased. It is also possible, and it will be possible to greatly contribute to the diversification of games. In other words, it is possible to further diversify the game by not only making the advantage of each ball entry part different such as the ball entry rate and the advantage, but also by combining the time element of the digestion speed. ..

Feature A12. The probability that the transition means will shift to the advantageous state after the specific state that has shifted based on the lottery result of the first lottery means (probability that the first V will be a jackpot result that may shift to the high probability mode). , Probability of shifting to the advantageous state after the specific state that has shifted based on the lottery result of the second lottery means (probability of a first V jackpot result or a second V jackpot result that may shift to a high probability mode) The gaming machine according to feature A11, characterized in that and are set to different probabilities.

According to the above configuration, not only the digestion speed is different depending on the ball entry part to be entered, but also the probability of shifting to the advantageous state is different depending on the lottery (first lottery / second lottery) performed based on the entry. Therefore, it is possible to further diversify the game. For example, if the probability of shifting to an advantageous state based on the first lottery is higher than the probability of shifting to an advantageous state based on the second lottery, the one who enters the first ball entry section will move to the second ball entry section. Not only is the result notified earlier (shifting to an advantageous state sooner) than letting the ball enter, but the probability of transitioning to that advantageous state is also higher, so the first ball entry section side is basically more for the player. Can be advantageous to. On the other hand, if the probability of shifting to the advantageous state is higher based on the second lottery, the result will be notified later if the ball is entered into the second entry section, but the probability of shifting to the advantageous state will be higher. Depending on the situation of the player, the second entry section may be more advantageous in relation to the period during which the change display is performed.

Feature A13. Rather than the probability that the transition means will shift to the advantageous state after the specific state that has transitioned based on the lottery result of the first lottery means (the probability that the first V will be a jackpot result that may shift to the high probability mode). , Probability that the transition means shifts to the advantageous state after the specific state that has shifted based on the lottery result of the second lottery means (first V with jackpot result or second V with jackpot result that may shift to high probability mode) The gaming machine according to feature A12, wherein the probability of becoming) is set to a higher probability.

In general, it is considered preferable for the ball entry part, which is advantageous for the player, to increase the digestion speed so that the player can receive the maximum benefit thereof. However, if this is done, the advantage for the player becomes too high, or the difference from the other ball entry section (the entry section on the non-advantageous side) becomes too large, and the player enters the other entry section. It may interfere with the game of making a ball (for example, a decrease in attention). Therefore, if the digestion rate of the ball entry portion on the advantageous side is slowed down as in the above configuration, the advantage of one ball entry section is not excessively increased in relation to the digestion rate, and both ball entry sections are used. It becomes possible to balance.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. An operating means (launch operating device 28) operated by the player, and
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area (game area PE) with a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating means.
A first ball entry section (right first operating port 33B) and a second ball entry section (second operating port 34) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball,
The first lottery means (the first special feature by the main control device 81) for executing the first lottery as to whether or not to give the first privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the first ball entry unit. Function to execute the pass / fail judgment process for figures) and
A second lottery for executing a second lottery as to whether or not to grant a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry portion. Means (a function of executing the hit / fail determination process for the second special figure by the main control device 81) and
When the predetermined payout conditions are satisfied, the payout control means (payout control device 77) that pays out the prize balls by the payout means (payout device 76) and
With
The gaming state includes a first gaming state (second probability variation state) in which the operating means is operated with a predetermined amount of operation and the ball is easier to enter the first ball entry section than the second ball entry section. , A second gaming state (first probability variation state) in which it is easier to enter the second ball entry section than the first ball entry section in a situation where the operation means is operated with the predetermined operation amount is set. Has been
The ratio (payout base) between the number of balls launched from the launching means and the number of prize balls paid out from the payout means per unit period is such that the operation amount of the operation means is the predetermined operation amount. A gaming machine characterized in that the first gaming state and the second gaming state are set to be the same or substantially the same.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to diversify the game by having different ball entry portions that are easy to enter depending on the game state and different benefits to be obtained. Furthermore, even if the game status is different, the deduction between the number of fired balls and the number of prize balls is set to be the same, so the game is diversified in relation to the ease of entering the ball and the benefits that can be obtained. Also, it is possible to provide a novel game machine that realizes two types of games at the same ratio of the number of fired balls and the number of prize balls.

Feature B2. In a situation where the operation amount of the operation means is a predetermined operation amount, the first ball entry portion and the second entry portion are located at positions where the ball can enter any of the first entry portion and the second entry portion. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the ball portion is arranged.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to play a game without changing the operation amount of the operating means even in different gaming states. Not only that, since the ratio between the number of fired balls and the number of prize balls is set in the same manner as described above, the player can use the number of fired balls and the number of prize balls without changing the operation amount of the operating means. It is possible to enjoy different playability without worrying about the ratio of.

Feature B3. A receiving means (electric accessory 331) provided in the first ball-entry portion and capable of switching between a receiving state in which the game ball is easily accepted in the first ball-entry portion and a non-accepting state in which the game ball is less likely to be accepted than the receiving state. )When,
Acceptance control executing means (function for executing support processing by the main control device 81) for executing acceptance control for switching the acceptance state from the non-acceptance state to the acceptance state and then switching to the non-acceptance state.
With
As modes in which the acceptance control is executed by the acceptance control executing means, a high acceptance mode (high frequency support mode) and a low acceptance mode in which the acceptance rate to the first ball entry unit per unit period is relatively high or low. (Low frequency support mode) is set,
The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, characterized in that the high acceptance mode is set in the first gaming state and the low acceptance mode is set in the second gaming state.

According to the above configuration, since the acceptance rate is improved or decreased because the acceptance means is provided in the first entry section, the first lottery based on the entry into the first entry section is performed. The frequency of being struck changes. With such a configuration, even if the ratio between the number of launched balls and the number of prize balls in the first entry section temporarily decreases, the ratio between the number of launched balls and the number of prize balls is totally improved. It can be combined with the ratio on the second ball entry side.

Feature B4. The gaming machine according to feature B3, wherein the first ball entry section is arranged on the upstream side of the second ball entry section.

According to the above configuration, it is easier to enter the first ball entry section than the second ball entry section in the high acceptance mode. In other words, it is possible to suppress an event in which it becomes difficult to enter the first ball entry section by entering the second ball entry section in the high acceptance mode. By doing so, it is possible to set a high ball entry rate to the second ball entry section within a range that does not affect the ball entry rate to the first ball entry section.

Feature B5. A variable ball entry means (variable winning devices 32A, 32B) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which a game ball is less likely to enter than the open state is provided. ,
The predetermined payout condition includes at least that the game ball has entered the variable ball entry means.
A switching control executing means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for executing unit switching control for switching the variable ball entry means from the closed state to the open state and then switching to the closed state.
As the first privilege or the second privilege, a transition means (mainly) for shifting the gaming state to a special state in which the unit switching control is executed a predetermined number of times and can be executed a plurality of times. (A function to execute the game state transition process by the control device 81) and
With
As a result of the first lottery or the second lottery, a special result in which the specific switching control can be executed only once is set.
Based on the result of the first lottery or the second lottery being the special result, the specific switching control executing means (special removal by the main control device 81) for executing the specific switching control by the variable ball entering means. Equipped with a function to execute the opening and closing process of the big prize opening at the time)
Described in any one of features B1 to B4, wherein the probability that the special result will be obtained by the first lottery and the probability that the special result will be obtained by the second lottery are set to be different. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, the number of shot balls and the prize are obtained by differentiating the probability of a special result without changing the probability or the ball entry rate of the first benefit or the second benefit based on the entry into each ball entry section. It is possible to make the ratio with the number of balls the same. In this case, it is advisable to set the lottery on the side with the lower privilege or the side with the lower ball entry rate so that the probability of a special result is high. Further, when the above configuration is applied to a configuration having a receiving means such as feature B3 (a configuration in which the ratio of the number of launched balls to the number of prize balls on the first entry portion side can be improved), a special result is obtained in the second lottery. If the probability of becoming a prize is increased, the ratio between the number of shot balls and the number of prize balls on the second entry section side can be improved without increasing the probability of becoming the second privilege in the second lottery, and the first lottery side. It is possible to match the ratio between the number of fired balls and the number of prize balls.

The above configuration can also be expressed as follows.
"Variable ball entry means (variable winning devices 32A, 32B) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which a game ball is less likely to enter than the open state. Prepare
The predetermined payout condition includes at least that the game ball has entered the variable ball entry means.
A switching control executing means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for executing switching control between the closed state and the open state of the variable ball entering means, and
As the first privilege or the second privilege, a transition means (main control device 81) that shifts the game state to a special state in which a predetermined round game for which switching control is performed by the switching control execution means can be executed a plurality of predetermined times. (A function to execute the game state transition process) and
With
As a result of the first lottery or the second lottery, a special result (special deviation result) is set so that a predetermined switching control by the switching control executing means can be executed.
Based on the result of the first lottery or the second lottery being the special result, the means for executing the predetermined switching control by the variable ball entry means (large at the time of special disconnection by the main control device 81). Equipped with a function to execute the winning opening opening / closing process)
Described in any one of features B1 to B4, wherein the probability that the special result will be obtained by the first lottery and the probability that the special result will be obtained by the second lottery are set to be different. Game machine. "
Feature B6. The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein the variable ball entry means is arranged on the upstream side of at least one of the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to avoid the loss of the ball entry opportunity to the variable ball entry means due to the ball entering the first ball entry section or the second ball entry section during the specific switching control based on the special result. it can.

Feature B7. In the first lottery and the second lottery, after a lottery opportunity occurs, after a predetermined notification period, the result is a predetermined notification means (first special figure display unit 37a, second special figure display unit 37b). It is a configuration that is notified by
The relationship between the length of the predetermined notification period set based on the first lottery and the predetermined notification period set based on the second lottery is the relationship between the first gaming state and the said. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, which is set to be different from the second gaming state.

According to the above configuration, not only the ease of entering each ball entry portion differs depending on the game state, but also the predetermined notification period associated with the entry of the ball also differs. In this way, it is possible to realize a game playability with a good digestibility and a game playability with a low digestibility of each lottery by using each ball entry portion. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game.

Feature B8. The predetermined notification period based on the entry into the ball entry portion on the side where it is difficult to enter the ball in the first gaming state and the second gaming state is the predetermined notification based on the entry into the other ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to feature B7, which is characterized in that a period longer than the usage period can be easily set.

According to the above configuration, since the predetermined notification period on the side where it is difficult for the player to enter the ball tends to be long, it is preferable to enter the ball on the side where the ball is easy to enter from the viewpoint of digestion efficiency. I think. However, since the ratio of the number of launched balls to the number of prize balls is set to be the same (substantially the same) in each of the ball entry sections, no loss or gain occurs depending on the ball entry section. In this way, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game while ensuring the fairness of the game for the game hall.

Feature B9. In the game area, a third ball entry section (lower first operating port 33A) provided separately from the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section and capable of entering the game ball is provided.
The third ball entry unit is at a position where the game ball is difficult to reach in a situation where the operating means is operated with the predetermined operating amount, and the operation is performed with a specific operating amount different from the predetermined operating amount. It is placed in a position that can be reached by operating the means,
The ratio of the number of launching balls to the number of prize balls in the situation where the operating means is operated with the specific operation amount, and the number of launching balls and the prize balls in the situation where the operating means is operated with the predetermined operation amount. The ratio to the number is set to be different,
A special lottery means (first special by the main control device 81) that executes a special lottery, which is one of the first lottery and the second lottery, based on the game ball entering the third ball entry unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, characterized in that it includes a function of executing a hit / fail determination process for drawing.

According to the above configuration, while the ball entry rate differs depending on the game state, the ratio between the number of launched balls and the number of prize balls is the same, in addition to the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section, these ratios are different. A third ball entry portion is provided as a ratio. The third ball entry section is provided at a position where the game ball does not reach in a situation where the first ball entry section or the second ball entry section is aimed (a situation in which the game is operated with a predetermined amount of operation). However, if the ball enters the third ball entry section, either the first lottery or the second lottery is performed. Therefore, in addition to the game playability based on the relationship between the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section and each game state, the game playability of aiming at the third ball entry section is also taken into consideration, and the game can be further diversified. ..

Feature B10. As the gaming state, a third gaming state (normal gaming state) is set separately from the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
The ratio of the number of fired balls to the number of prize balls in the situation where the operating means is operated with the specific operation amount is the number of fired balls and the prize balls in the situation where the operating means is operated with the predetermined operation amount. It is set to be lower than the ratio to the number,
The feature B9, wherein the first gaming state or the second gaming state can be transferred based on the result of the special lottery based on the entry of the ball into the third entry section. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, in the game aimed at the third entry section, the ratio of the number of launched balls to the number of prize balls is lower than that of aiming at the first entry section or the second entry section, but the third entry section is used. Depending on the result of the special lottery based on the entry into the club, it is possible to shift to the first gaming state or the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to realize a series of playability of first aiming at the third ball entry section and then aiming at the first ball entry section or the second ball entry section.

It should be noted that it may be possible to enter the first ball entry section or the second ball entry section without shifting to the first game state or the second game state, but the entry rate and digestibility are poor. Is preferable.

Feature B11. An operating means (launch operating device 28) operated by the player, and
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area (game area PE) with a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating means.
A first ball entry section (right first operating port 33B) and a second ball entry section (second operating port 34) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball,
The first lottery means (the first special feature by the main control device 81) for executing the first lottery as to whether or not to give the first privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the first ball entry unit. Function to execute the pass / fail judgment process for figures) and
A second lottery for executing a second lottery as to whether or not to grant a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry portion. Means (a function of executing the hit / fail determination process for the second special figure by the main control device 81) and
When the predetermined payout conditions are satisfied, the payout control means (payout control device 77) that pays out the prize balls by the payout means (payout device 76) and
With
Percentage of the number of balls launched from the launching means per unit period and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the predetermined payout conditions are satisfied based on the number of balls launched into the first ball entry section or the second ball entry section. (Payout base) is paid out when the predetermined payout condition is satisfied based on the entry into the first ball entry section, and the predetermined payout based on the entry into the second entry section. A gaming machine characterized in that it is set to be the same or substantially the same as when the conditions are satisfied and the payment is made.

According to the above configuration, the ratio of the number of launched balls to the number of prize balls is the same or substantially the same depending on whether the ball is entered into the first entry section or the second entry section. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game machine that realizes two types of games with different benefits (different lottery is performed) at the same ratio.

Feature B12. An operating means (launch operating device 28) operated by the player, and
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area (game area PE) with a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating means.
A first ball entry section (right first operating port 33B) and a second ball entry section (second operating port 34) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball,
The first lottery means (the first special feature by the main control device 81) for executing the first lottery as to whether or not to give the first privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the first ball entry unit. Function to execute the pass / fail judgment process for figures) and
A second lottery for executing a second lottery as to whether or not to grant a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry portion. Means (a function of executing the hit / fail determination process for the second special figure by the main control device 81) and
With
When the operating means is operated with a predetermined amount of operation, the expected degree of entry into the first entry section and the entry into the second entry section per unit number of game balls launched from the launching means. A gaming machine characterized in that the expected degree of a ball is set to be the same or substantially the same.

According to the above configuration, when the operating means is operated with a predetermined amount of operation, the expected degree of entry into each entry portion is set to be the same or substantially the same, so that the benefits obtained are different (different). It is possible to provide a novel game machine that realizes two types of games (in which a lottery is performed) with the same expectation of entering a ball.

It should be noted that each of the configurations limited by the features B1 to B10 may be individually applied to the feature B11 or the feature B12, or may be applied in combination.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. An operating means (launch operating device 28) operated by the player, and
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area (game area PE) with a firing intensity according to the operation mode of the operating means, and
A first ball entry section (lower first operating port 33A) and a second ball entry section (second operating port 34) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball,
The first lottery means (whether or not the first special drawing side by the main control device 81) performs the first lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the first ball entry unit. Function to execute lottery process) and
Based on the fact that the first lottery is performed by the first lottery means, a predetermined notification means (first special figure display unit 37a) performs an effect for the first notification, and then after a predetermined notification period, the said A first notification means (a function of executing the first game round control process by the main control device 81) for notifying the result of the first lottery, and
A second lottery means for performing a second lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry unit (whether or not the second special drawing by the main control device 81 is successful). Function to execute lottery process) and
Based on the fact that the second lottery is performed by the second lottery means, a predetermined notification means (second special figure display unit 37b) performs an effect for the second notification, and then after a predetermined notification period, the said A second notifying means (a function of executing a second game round control process by the main control device 81) for notifying the result of the second lottery, and
Variable entry means (variable winning devices 32A, 32B) provided in the game area and capable of being displaced between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter or cannot enter.
A function of changing the variable ball entry means from the closed state to the open state and then executing the variable ball entry control capable of executing the variable ball entry control (the function of executing the large winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 81). )When,
Based on the result of the first lottery or the second lottery being the result corresponding to the granting of the privilege, the variable ball entry control is performed by the variable ball entry control means from the normal game state to the game state. Game state transition means (function to execute game state transition processing by the main control device 81) to shift to the special state
With
The first lottery means has a configuration in which the next first lottery is performed after the effect for the first notification is performed by the first notification means.
The second lottery means has a configuration in which the next second lottery is performed after the effect for the second notification is performed by the second notification means.
The first setting means (of the first fluctuation display time by the main control device 81) for setting the notification period (variation display time on the first special figure side) when the effect for the first notification is performed by the first notification means. Function to execute setting process) and
The second setting means (of the second fluctuation display time by the main control device 81) for setting the notification period (variation display time on the second special figure side) when the effect for the second notification is performed by the second notification means. Function to execute setting process) and
With
The first ball entry section is more difficult to enter than the second ball entry section.
The first setting means is a gaming machine having a configuration that makes it easier to set a shorter notification period than the second setting means.

According to the above configuration, although it is more difficult for the first ball entry section to enter the ball than the second ball entry section, the notification period in which the effect for the first notification performed based on the entry into the first ball entry section is performed. Is likely to be shorter than the notification period in which the effect for the second notification is performed based on the entry into the second ball entry section, so that the frequency of the first lottery is higher than the frequency of the second lottery. Can also be high. Therefore, it is preferable for a player who desires an efficient lottery to enter the ball into the first ball entry section, and for a player who wants to enjoy a long production with a small number of shot balls, the ball is entered into the second ball entry section. Is preferable. In this way, it is possible to meet the diverse needs of the player with one game machine.

Feature C2. The first ball entry portion is provided at a position that can be reached in the game area when the operation mode of the operation means is the first operation mode.
The second ball entry portion is a second operation mode that is unreachable when the operation mode of the operation means is the first operation mode in the game area and is different from the first operation mode. The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that it is provided at a position that can be reached in some cases.

According to the above configuration, a game in which an efficient lottery is desired (a game in which a ball is entered into the first ball entry section) and a game in which a long effect is enjoyed (a game in which the ball is entered into the second ball entry section) are operated in different modes. Can be done at. As a result, each game can be clearly distinguished in a limited game area. For example, an event in which a player enters an undesired side of the ball and the undesired side of the game is played. Is avoided.

Feature C3. The probability that the result of the first lottery corresponds to the granting of the privilege and the probability that the result of the second lottery corresponds to the granting of the privilege are set as the same probability. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, it is possible to eliminate advantages and disadvantages in each game mode and ensure fairness while realizing a plurality of game modes as in feature C1.

Feature C4. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, wherein the first setting means has a configuration that makes it easier to set a shorter notification period than the second setting means in the normal gaming state.

According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature C1 can be exhibited in the normal gaming state before the special state which shifts depending on the result of the first lottery or the second lottery. That is, in general, most of the games stay in the normal game state, and it can be said that the point that the player is interested in is how to shift to the special state during the normal game state. Based on such a premise, if various game modes such as feature C1 are set, it is possible to make the transition pattern to the special state different depending on the ball entry part, and it is possible to improve the interest. .. In particular, if the player enters the ball by himself / herself as in feature C2, the player can select the pattern of transition to the special state by himself / herself, aiming to further improve the interest. It is preferable to the above.

Feature C5. One of the features C1 to C4 characterized in that the changing means (electric accessory 331) for causing a change in the ball entry rate to the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion is not provided. Described game machine.

According to the above configuration, since the ball entry rate of each ball entry portion does not change, it is possible to realize the unique playability described in the feature C1 regardless of the game state.

It should be noted that the above configuration is such that "the ball entry rate into the first ball entry section and the ball entry rate into the second ball entry section are such that the gaming state does not change between the normal gaming state and the special state. It can also be expressed as "there is".

Further, the above configuration is such that "the first ball entry portion is formed so that the ball entry rate to the first ball entry portion does not change when the operation means is operated in a predetermined operation mode. The second ball entry section is formed so that the ball entry rate to the second ball entry section does not change when the operating means is operated in a predetermined operation mode. "

Feature C6. A feature C1 to C5, wherein the variable ball entry means is provided at a position reachable when the operation means is operated in an operation mode capable of entering the second ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the above configuration, if the game ball is launched aiming at the variable ball entry means, the ball can also enter the second ball entry section. In this way, although the result of the second lottery based on the entry into the second entry section is not easily notified, the privilege based on the entry into the second entry section (for example, the lottery of the second lottery). It will be possible to obtain an opportunity (such as a prize ball). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the advantage of the special state in which the variable ball entry control is performed.

The "operation mode in which the ball can enter the second ball entry portion" can be expressed as the "second operation mode" described in the feature C2.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A first ball entry section (first actuating port 33) and a second ball entry section (second actuating port 34) provided in the game area (gaming area PE) and capable of entering the game ball,
The first lottery means (the first special feature by the main control device 81) for executing the first lottery as to whether or not to give the first privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the first ball entry unit. Function to execute the winning / failing lottery process for figures) and
A second lottery means (second special feature by the main control device 81) for executing a second lottery as to whether or not to give the player a second privilege based on the game ball entering the second entry unit. Function to execute the winning / failing lottery process for figures) and
Based on the first lottery by the first lottery means, the change display of the pattern is started in the first display unit (first special figure display unit 37a), and the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means is displayed. The first display control means to be displayed (a function of executing the first game times control process by the main control device 81) and
Based on the second lottery by the second lottery means, the second display unit (second special figure display unit 37b) starts the change display of the pattern, and the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the second lottery means is displayed. The second display control means to be displayed (a function of executing the second game times control process by the main control device 81) and
With
The first lottery means and the second lottery means can each execute the lottery independently.
The first display control means and the second display control means can independently display a change in the pattern on the corresponding first display unit or the second display unit.
A selection means capable of selecting which of the first lottery means and the second lottery means is preferentially executed at a predetermined selection opportunity (game times by the main control device 81 in the second embodiment). A gaming machine characterized by having a function (function to execute control processing).

According to the above configuration, the first lottery based on the entry into the first ball entry and the change display of the pattern accompanying it, and the second lottery based on the entry into the second entry section and the change display of the pattern accompanying it. If, and are executed independently, each game can be enjoyed at the same time, and the interest can be improved. On the other hand, in performing such a game, inconveniences such as not being able to execute both lottery at the same time may occur. Therefore, if one of the lottery is selected and the lottery process itself is performed at different timings at a predetermined selection opportunity, it is possible to preferably realize a game in which both lottery are performed in parallel.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the predetermined selection trigger is a case where the execution timings of the first lottery means and the second lottery means overlap.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to preferably realize a game in which both lottery systems are performed in parallel while avoiding an increase in processing load due to overlapping lottery timings.

Feature D3. A special control capable of stopping or temporarily stopping the change display of the pattern by the first display control means or the second display control means based on the establishment of a predetermined predetermined condition (any of the jackpot results). Equipped with a control means (a function to execute forced termination processing by the main control device 81)
When the special control is performed by the special control means, the selection means performs the special control among the first display control means and the second display control means at the next predetermined selection opportunity. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, wherein a side different from the other side is selected.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine in which two lottery systems are executed in parallel, if special control such as cancellation of one lottery system is performed, the next time the game is canceled, etc. The reverse lottery system is preferentially selected. In this way, if each lottery system is carried out alternately, it is possible to entertain both of the two lottery systems.

Feature D4. The predetermined condition is that the result corresponds to the granting of the first privilege in the first lottery, or the result corresponds to the granting of the second privilege in the second lottery. The gaming machine according to feature D3, characterized in that it is included.

According to the above configuration, the change display of the pattern of the other lottery system is canceled or once due to the granting of the first privilege or the second privilege, that is, the winning result in one of the lottery systems. It will be stopped. As a result, in a configuration in which two lottery systems are performed in parallel, it is possible to avoid dispersion of points of interest due to continuous execution of the other lottery system even though one is a hit. .. On the other hand, the side that has been canceled or temporarily stopped as described above may be concerned that the player may feel distrust that the lottery has been ruined. On the other hand, as described in feature D3, in the subsequent predetermined selection opportunity, the side that has been canceled or temporarily stopped is preferentially selected, so that the above distrust can be dispelled and a fair game is provided. can do.

Feature D5. Variable ball entry means (variable winning devices 32A, 32B) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which a game ball is less likely to enter than the open state.
A switching control executing means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for executing unit switching control for switching the variable ball entry means from the closed state to the open state and then switching to the closed state.
As the first privilege or the second privilege, a transition means (mainly) for shifting the gaming state to a special state in which the unit switching control is executed a predetermined number of times and can be executed a plurality of times. (A function to execute the game state transition process by the control device 81) and
The gaming machine according to feature D4, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, when the result is that the privilege can be obtained in the first lottery or the second lottery, the process shifts to a special state in which the specific switching control is executed a plurality of times by the variable ball entry means. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, and during that time, the interest in the other tends to diminish. Therefore, it can be said that the significance of stopping or temporarily stopping the change display of the other pattern is increased. Not only that, the fact that the specific switching control is executed a plurality of times requires at least a period for performing such control, and if the change display of the other pattern is continued during that period, the effect in the period is required. Will be wasted. Therefore, if the above configuration is used, it is possible to perform each lottery system in parallel, and at the same time, pay attention to one of them.

Feature D6. As a result of the first lottery or the second lottery, a special result in which the specific switching control can be executed only once is set.
Based on the result of the first lottery or the second lottery being the special result, the specific switching control executing means (special removal by the main control device 81) for executing the specific switching control by the variable ball entering means. Equipped with a function to execute the opening and closing process of the big prize opening at the time)
When the specific switching control is performed based on the special result, the means for restricting the stop or temporary stop of the change display of the pattern by the special control means (execution of the process of step S409 or step S909 by the main control device 81). The gaming machine according to feature D5, which is characterized by having a function of performing.

According to the above configuration, the stop or temporary stop of the change display of the pattern is limited to a special state in which the specific switching control in which a large number of game balls will enter the variable ball entry means is performed a plurality of times. In other words, in the special result where the number of balls entered into the variable ball entry means is small, the change display of the pattern is not stopped or temporarily stopped. This is based on the level of interest of the player due to the difference between the number of balls entered and the number of balls entered, and according to the above configuration, the change display of the pattern despite the result that the player's interest is low. It is possible to suppress the confusion of the player due to the cancellation or temporary stop.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. An operating means (launch operating device 28) operated by the player, and
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area (game area PE) with a firing intensity according to the operation mode of the operating means, and
A first ball entry portion (lower first operating port 33A, third operating port 51, fifth operating port 100) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball.
A second ball entry section (second actuation port 34, fourth actuating port 52 in high frequency support mode, high) provided in the game area and capable of ball entry and different from the first ball entry section. 7th operating port 120) in frequency support mode,
Specific means (arrangement of nails 24b and support by electric accessory 52a) for facilitating the game ball from entering the second entry portion from the first entry portion, and
The first lottery means (whether or not the first special drawing side by the main control device 81) performs the first lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the first ball entry unit. Function to execute lottery process) and
Based on the fact that the first lottery is performed by the first lottery means, a predetermined notification means (first special figure display unit 37a) performs an effect for the first notification, and then after a predetermined notification period, the said A first notification means (a function of executing the first game round control process by the main control device 81) for notifying the result of the first lottery, and
A second lottery means for performing a second lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry unit (whether or not the second special drawing by the main control device 81 is successful). Function to execute lottery process) and
Based on the fact that the second lottery is performed by the second lottery means, a predetermined notification means (second special figure display unit 37b) performs an effect for the second notification, and then after a predetermined notification period, the said A second notifying means (a function of executing a second game round control process by the main control device 81) for notifying the result of the second lottery, and
Variable entry means (variable winning devices 32A, 32B, 55, 56, 57) provided in the game area and capable of being displaced into an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is difficult or impossible to enter. When,
A function of changing the variable ball entry means from the closed state to the open state and then executing the variable ball entry control capable of executing the variable ball entry control (the function of executing the large winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 81). )When,
Based on the result of the first lottery or the second lottery being the result corresponding to the granting of the privilege, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player (game state transition process by the main control device 81). Function to execute) and
With
The first lottery means has a configuration in which the next first lottery is performed after the effect for the first notification is performed by the first notification means.
The second lottery means has a configuration in which the next second lottery is performed after the effect for the second notification is performed by the second notification means.
The first setting means (on the first special figure side by the main control device 81) for setting the notification period (variation display time on the first special figure side) when the first notification effect is performed by the first notification means. Function to execute the setting process of the variable display time) and
A second setting means (on the second special drawing side by the main control device 81) for setting a notification period (variation display time on the second special drawing side) when the second notification effect is performed by the second notification means. Function to execute the setting process of the variable display time) and
With
The second setting means sets a longer notification period than the first setting means in a situation where the second ball entry portion is easier to enter than the first ball entry portion by the specific means. Easy-to-use special setting means (in the first and second embodiments, the function is to set the variation display time on the second special figure side during the normal gaming state by the main control device 81, and the third and fourth embodiments. Then, the function of setting the fluctuation display time on the second special figure side in the first high frequency support mode by the main control device 81, and in the fifth embodiment, setting the fluctuation display time on the second special figure side in the second probability variation state. A game machine characterized by having a function).

According to the above configuration, since the specific means is provided, the first ball entry section is easier to enter than the second ball entry section, and the notification period of the first notification effect based on the ball entry is the second. It is easy to set a short period compared to the effect for notification. In other words, the effect for the second notification performed based on the ball entering the second ball entry portion on the side where the game ball is likely to enter is performed in a relatively long notification period. In other words, if the second ball entry section is aimed at, it is possible to perform the second lottery with a relatively small number of launched balls, and it is possible to enjoy the production for the second notification based on the second lottery for a long time. Become. Therefore, it is possible to play a game for a long time with a small investment, and it is possible to meet various needs of the game.

Further, according to the above configuration, in the case where the ball is entered into the second ball entry section to produce the effect for the second notification, if the ball is entered into the second ball entry section again, the ball entry is easy. On the other hand, the second lottery itself is not performed immediately because the ball entering is likely to occur during the production for the second notification. Then, a large difference is likely to occur between the timing of the second lottery based on the entry into the second entry section and the timing of entry into the second entry section. Then, for example, if the configuration is such that the occurrence of entry into the second entry section can be stored up to a predetermined number, the entry exceeding the predetermined number is the entry in which the second lottery is not performed. That is, in a configuration in which a lottery is performed based on a ball entry, an event that makes it difficult to perform a lottery based on the ball entry is likely to occur. In the above configuration, the first lottery based on the entry into the first entry section is the second entry section, while the above configuration may cause an event that makes it difficult to carry out the lottery based on the entry. Compared to the side, it is unlikely that the lottery will be difficult to carry out. That is, it is possible to prevent the second lottery from being performed by entering the second ball entry section, and to perform the first lottery by entering the first ball entry section. It is considered that the use of a configuration in which such an event occurs will greatly contribute to the realization of new playability. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game and preferably increase the degree of attention.

In addition, "the acquisition means for acquiring the lottery information used for the second lottery based on the occurrence of the ball entering the second ball entry portion, and the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. A storage means for storing up to a predetermined number is provided, and the second lottery means sequentially executes the second lottery based on the lottery information stored in the storage means. " It is possible to more clearly show that the second lottery may not be executed immediately based on the entry into the second entry section.

In addition, if the configuration is provided with "a means of paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the game balls entering the second entry section", the second lottery will not be performed, but the second entry will be made. By generating a ball entering the ball portion, it is possible to bring about the merit of assisting the holding ball.

Feature E2. The first lottery means executes the first lottery based on the occurrence of a ball entering the first ball entry unit even during the execution of the second notification by the second notification means. The gaming machine according to feature E1, which is characterized in that the configuration is capable of

According to the above configuration, even during the second notification for a long period of time based on the entry into the second entry section, the entry into the first entry section is generated. You can take the first lottery. In this way, not only long-term games based on entry into the second ball entry section but also short-term games based on entry into the first ball entry section can be performed to meet various needs. It is possible to realize a game.

Feature E3. When the subsequent game ball enters the second ball entry portion by setting the long notification period by the second setting means, the second lottery by the second lottery means based on the ball entry. The gaming machine according to the feature E1 or the feature E2, wherein the game is not implemented or is difficult to be implemented.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the second lottery is performed based on the entry into the second entry section, even if the entry into the second entry section occurs, the second lottery is substantially performed. It is possible to have no configuration. If such an event occurs, it becomes possible to realize a novel playability as shown in the feature E1.

In addition, "when a subsequent game ball enters the second ball entry portion, the second lottery by the second lottery means will not be performed or will be difficult to be performed based on the ball entry" with a long notification period. Is preferably, and more preferably, "a notification period having a length of 10 times or more the notification period set by the first setting means" in relation to the notification period set by the first setting means. "A notification period having a length of 100 times or more the notification period set by the first setting means" and "a notification period having a length of 1000 times or more the notification period set by the first setting means". Is more preferable.

Feature E4. As a game state, the first state (first state) in which the notification period when the second notification effect is performed is easier to set than the notification period when the first notification effect is performed. As the state in which the game times on the special figure side proceed, the normal game state in the first and second embodiments, the first high frequency support mode in the third and fourth embodiments, and the second probability change in the second embodiment. The second state (second state) in which the notification period when the first notification effect is performed is longer than the notification period when the second notification effect is performed. As the state in which the game round on the special figure side progresses, the first probability variation state in the first and second embodiments, the second high frequency support mode in the third and fourth embodiments, and the first in the fifth embodiment. (Probability change state) and is set,
The special setting means sets a notification period when the effect for the second notification is performed in the first state.
It is provided with a switching means (a function of executing a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in the main control device 81) that causes switching between the first state and the second state based on the occurrence of a predetermined switching trigger. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that the device is

According to the above configuration, the switching between the second state and the first state causes the notification period of the second notification performed based on the ball entering the second ball entry portion to be shortened or lengthened. As a result, the relative ease of performing the second lottery based on the entry into the second entry section changes. That is, in the first state, the first lottery based on the entry into the first ball entry section is likely to be carried out, and the second lottery based on the entry into the second ball entry section is difficult to be carried out. Further, in the second state, the first lottery based on the entry into the first ball entry section is difficult to be carried out, and the second lottery based on the entry into the second ball entry section is likely to be carried out. By doing so, it is possible to greatly contribute to the diversification of games.

Feature E5. The switching means changes from the first state to the first state based on the result of the first lottery becoming a predetermined first switching result (big hit result with 1V, probability variation big hit result) as the predetermined switching trigger. The gaming machine according to feature E4, which has a configuration capable of causing switching to two states.

According to the above configuration, in the first state where the notification period for the first notification is shorter than the notification period for the second notification, the first lottery is easier to carry out than the second lottery. Depending on the result of the lottery, a switch to the second state may occur, which facilitates the second lottery. As a result, not only the first lottery but also the second lottery can be performed, and the significance of having a plurality of lottery systems such as the first lottery and the second lottery can be guaranteed.

Feature E6. The switching means changes from the second state to the second state based on the result of the second lottery becoming a predetermined second switching result (big hit result with 2V, normal deviation result) as the predetermined switching trigger. The gaming machine according to feature E4 or feature E5, which has a configuration capable of causing switching to one state.

According to the above configuration, switching to the first state in which the first lottery is likely to be performed may occur depending on the result of the second lottery carried out in the second state in which the second lottery is likely to be performed. As a result, the significance of having a plurality of lottery systems such as the first lottery and the second lottery can be guaranteed.

Feature E7. When the operation mode of the operation means is a predetermined operation mode, the first input is such that the game ball launched by the launch means can reach the first entry portion and the second entry portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the positions of the ball portion and the second ball entry portion are determined.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to enter the ball into the second ball entry section while aiming at the first ball entry section. As a result, the effect of the feature E1 can be obtained without changing the operation mode of the operation means.

Feature E8. The game machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, wherein the game ball that has entered the first ball entry section has a configuration that allows the ball to enter the second ball entry section.

According to the above configuration, if the ball enters the first ball entry section, the first lottery is performed and the ball may further enter the second ball entry section. That is, the first lottery and the second lottery may be carried out in duplicate by one game ball. However, even if a ball enters the second ball entry section, the second lottery may not be performed as described above. In this case, only the first lottery is performed. If each lottery is duplicated, the privilege is likely to be given, which is advantageous for the player, and if it is not duplicated, the advantage is lower than in the case of duplication. In this way, if the advantage for the player changes depending on the situation on the side of the second entry section, the advantage can be changed without changing the winning probability of the first lottery or the second lottery. , It becomes possible to provide a novel game utilizing this phenomenon.

Feature E9. The first ball entry portion is provided at a position that can be reached in the game area when the operation mode of the operation means is the first operation mode.
The second ball entry portion is a second operation mode that is unreachable when the operation mode of the operation means is the first operation mode in the game area and is different from the first operation mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, characterized in that it is provided at a reachable position in some cases.

According to the above configuration, there is a case where a ball enters the first ball entry section to execute the first notification for a short period of time, and a case where a ball enters the second ball entry section to generate a long-term second notification. It is possible for the player to clearly select when to execute and when to execute. As a result, for example, an event in which a player enters an undesired side of the ball and the undesired side of the game is played is avoided.

Feature E10. The privilege granting means has different advantages for the player between the privilege granted based on the result of the first lottery and the privilege granted based on the result of the second lottery. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9, characterized in that it can be imparted.

According to the above configuration, benefits having different advantages are given between the first lottery and the second lottery. As a result, it is possible to make a difference between the first lottery, which is easy to be carried out by entering the ball, and the second lottery, which is difficult to be carried out even if the ball is entered, including the advantage. For example, if the first lottery is given a privilege that is more advantageous than the second lottery, the rarity and superiority of the first lottery on the side of the first entry section, which is difficult to enter, can be enhanced. However, if the second lottery is configured to give a privilege having a higher advantage, the second lottery is difficult to be carried out, so that there is not much difference in the substantial advantage. By providing a difference in the degree of advantage in this way, the game can be diversified.

Feature E11. The game according to feature E10, wherein the first lottery and the second lottery are set so that the probabilities corresponding to the granting of the privilege are the same or substantially the same. Machine.

According to the above configuration, the winning probability of the winning / failing lottery is the same or substantially the same while providing a difference in the advantage of the privilege to be given, thereby simplifying the configuration such as sharing the winning / failing lottery configuration. be able to.

Feature E12. A variable ball entry means (variable winning device 32) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which a flowing game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter than the open state.
A switching control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for executing switching control between the open state and the closed state of the variable ball entry means, and
With
The privilege granting means has a configuration in which the privilege can be granted by shifting the gaming state to a specific state in which the switching control is performed by the switching control means.
The game machine according to any one of features E1 to E11, wherein the variable ball entry means is arranged on the downstream side of the second ball entry portion in the game area.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to generate a ball entering the second ball entry portion while aiming at the variable ball entry means in a specific state. As a result, after the specific state, the effect for the second notification based on the entry into the second ball entry portion generated during the specific state becomes easy to be performed, and the effect is based on the subsequent entry into the second ball entry section. It is possible to create a situation where it is difficult to hold the second lottery.

Feature E13. Acquisition means for acquiring lottery information used for the second lottery based on the occurrence of a ball entering the second ball entry unit (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port by the main control device 81). When,
A storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number is provided.
The second lottery means is configured to sequentially execute the second lottery based on the lottery information stored in the storage means.
In a situation where the predetermined number of the lottery information is stored in the storage means, it is possible to give a predetermined privilege to the player based on the occurrence of the ball entering the second ball entry section. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E12, characterized in that the means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2803 and S2806 by the effect control device 82 and the image change processing for holding) are provided.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where a predetermined number of lottery information is stored, the lottery information is not acquired by entering the second ball entry section, and the second lottery corresponding to the entry is not performed. .. As described in the feature E1, such a situation is likely to occur in this game machine, and in the above configuration, in such a situation, a configuration capable of further encouraging entry into the second entry section is provided. There is.

Feature E14. An operating means (launch operating device 28) operated by the player, and
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area (game area PE) with a firing intensity according to the operation mode of the operating means, and
With
In the game area,
The first ball entry part (lower first operating port 33A) where the game ball can enter, and
A second ball entry section (second operating port 34) different from the first ball entry section,
It is possible to switch between a guidance state (open state) in which the game ball is easily guided to the second entry portion and a non-guidance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult to guide the game ball to the second entry portion than in the guidance state. Guidance means (electric accessory 52a) and
Is provided,
Switching control means (function for executing electric service support processing by the main control device 81) between the guided state and the non-guided state of the guiding means, and
The first lottery means (whether or not the first special drawing side by the main control device 81) performs the first lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the first ball entry unit. Function to execute lottery process) and
A second lottery means for performing a second lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry unit (whether or not the second special drawing by the main control device 81 is successful). Function to execute lottery process) and
Based on the result of the first lottery or the second lottery being the granting response result corresponding to the granting of the privilege, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player (game state by the main control device 81). Function to execute migration process) and
With
As the gaming state, a high guidance state (high frequency support mode) and a low guidance state (low frequency support mode) are set so that the susceptibility of the guidance means to the guidance state is relatively high or low. Ori
In the high guidance state, the first means (in the third and fourth embodiments, the main control) in which the second lottery by the second lottery means is executed with priority over the first lottery by the first lottery means. The function of executing the game times on the second special figure side in the second high frequency support mode by the device 81, in the fifth embodiment, the game times on the second special figure side in the first probability variation state by the main control device 81. Function to execute) and
In the high guidance state, the second means (main control device in the third and fourth embodiments) for executing the first lottery by the first lottery means with priority over the second lottery by the second lottery means. The function of executing the game times on the first special figure side in the first high-frequency support mode by 81, and in the fifth embodiment, the game times on the first special figure side in the second probability variation state by the main control device 81. Function to execute) and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, in the high induction state, the entry into the second entry portion is likely to be induced, so that the entry into the second entry portion is likely to occur. The first lottery is performed when the ball enters the first ball entry section, and the second lottery is performed when the ball enters the second ball entry section. In the high induction state, the first lottery is performed. In some cases, the second lottery is prioritized over the first lottery, and in other cases, the first lottery is prioritized over the second lottery. By doing so, in a highly guided state where the ball is likely to enter the second ball entry section, a novel game property that is significantly different from the uniform game machine in which the second lottery is simply performed frequently. Can be realized.

Further, in the configuration in which the prize ball is paid out based on the entry into the second entry section, the second entry is in a highly guided state in which the entry into the second entry section frequently occurs. By the prize ball based on the entry into the club, it is possible to play a game in which the number of balls held is suppressed. In this case, the second lottery based on the entry into the second entry section may be performed, or the first lottery based on the entry into the first entry section may be performed. That is, it is possible to perform the first lottery while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held, and it is possible to perform the second lottery. In this way, it is possible to greatly contribute to the diversification of games.

In addition, each configuration shown in features E1 to E13 may be applied individually or in combination to the above feature E14. In this case, the expression may be appropriately modified according to the configuration of the feature E14.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. An operating means (launch operating device 28) operated by the player, and
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area (game area PE) with a firing intensity according to the operation mode of the operating means, and
The first ball entry section (third actuation port 51, sixth actuation port 110, eighth actuation port 91) and the second ball entry section (fourth actuation port 52,) into which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter. 7th operating port 120, 9th operating port 92),
The first lottery means (whether or not the first special drawing side by the main control device 81) performs the first lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the first ball entry unit. Function to execute lottery process) and
Based on the fact that the first lottery is performed by the first lottery means, a predetermined notification means (first special figure display unit 37a) performs an effect for the first notification, and then after a predetermined notification period, the said A first notification means (a function of executing the first game round control process by the main control device 81) for notifying the result of the first lottery, and
A second lottery means for performing a second lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry unit (whether or not the second special drawing by the main control device 81 is successful). Function to execute lottery process) and
Based on the fact that the second lottery is performed by the second lottery means, a predetermined notification means (second special figure display unit 37b) performs an effect for the second notification, and then after a predetermined notification period, the said A second notifying means (a function of executing a second game round control process by the main control device 81) for notifying the result of the second lottery, and
Based on the result of the first lottery being the granting response result corresponding to the granting of the privilege, the first privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player (in the game state transition process by the main control device 81). 1 Function to execute the process of setting the open / close execution mode on the special drawing side) and
Based on the result of the second lottery being the granting response result corresponding to the granting of the privilege, the second privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player (in the game state transition process by the main control device 81). 2 Function to execute the process of setting the open / close execution mode on the special figure side) and
With
The first notification means can perform the production for the first notification while the production for the second notification is being performed by the second notification means.
The second notification means has a configuration capable of performing the production for the second notification while the production for the first notification is being performed by the first notification means.
The first ball entry section and the second ball entry section so that the game ball launched into the game area with a predetermined firing intensity can reach both the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section. The ball entry part is arranged,
A first state that limits the progress of the second lottery and allows the progress of the first lottery (as a state in which the game on the first special drawing side is advanced, the first high frequency state in the third and fourth embodiments). , The second probability variation state in the fifth embodiment) and the second state (a state in which the game on the second special drawing side is advanced) that limits the progress of the first lottery and allows the progress of the second lottery. The game setting means (the first control device 81 in the third to sixth embodiments) for setting the second high frequency state in the third and fourth embodiments and the first probability variation state in the fifth embodiment). A gaming machine characterized in that it has a function of executing a function of setting a variable display time on the 1st special drawing side and the 2nd special drawing side).

According to the above configuration, when the game ball enters the first entry section, the first lottery is performed and the effect for the first notification is performed, and when the game ball enters the second entry section, the second lottery is performed. In the configuration in which the first ball entry section and the second entry ball section are launched at a predetermined firing intensity, the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section can enter any of the game balls when the game ball is launched at a predetermined firing intensity. On the other hand, the progress of one of the first lottery and the second lottery may be restricted and the progress of the other may be allowed. As a result, it is possible to limit the lottery system that is substantially carried out while having a configuration in which both the lottery system of the first lottery and the second lottery can be carried out in parallel in the same launch mode. Therefore, in a configuration having a plurality of lottery systems, it is possible to realize various games utilizing the game characteristics of each lottery system without changing the launch mode, and it is possible to greatly contribute to the diversification of games. Become.

Feature F2. The game setting means has the limitation and the allowance so as not to cause a change in the ease of entering the ball into the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section between the first state and the second state. The gaming machine according to feature F1, which is characterized in that it has a configuration capable of performing the above.

According to the above configuration, the first state in which the progress of the first lottery is allowed and the second state in which the progress of the second lottery is allowed are realized without changing the ball entry rate of each entry section. Can be done. That is, in the first state and the second state, it is possible to enter the ball into both the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section, and the ball entry into each entry section is not restricted. Switching between the first state and the second state is performed. By doing so, for example, in a configuration in which prize balls are paid out based on the entry of balls into each entry section, playability is realized in consideration of the prize balls based on entry into both entry sections. It can greatly contribute to the diversification of games.

Feature F3. Means for switching between the first state and the second state based on the result of the first lottery or the second lottery (a function of executing a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode by the main control device 81). The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, switching between the first state and the second state is performed based on the result of the first lottery or the second lottery. In this way, in the game playability in which either the first lottery or the second lottery progresses, the other can be performed without being biased to the lottery of only one.

Feature F4. The first setting means (of the first fluctuation display time by the main control device 81) for setting the notification period (variation display time on the first special figure side) when the effect for the first notification is performed by the first notification means. Function to execute setting process) and
The second setting means (of the second fluctuation display time by the main control device 81) for setting the notification period (variation display time on the second special figure side) when the effect for the second notification is performed by the second notification means. Function to execute setting process) and
With
When the game setting means limits the progress of the first lottery and allows the progress of the second lottery, the notification period set by the first setting means is set by the second setting means. When the progress of the first lottery is allowed and the progress of the second lottery is restricted by making it easier to be longer than the notification period, the notification period set by the first setting means is set by the second setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, characterized in that the configuration can be made shorter than the notification period.

According to the above configuration, in a game machine in which the first lottery system and the second lottery system can be carried out in parallel, which lottery system is advanced only by adjusting the length of the notification period of each lottery system. Can be determined. By doing so, it is possible to realize a novel game playability without significantly changing the configuration of the conventional game machine.

Feature F5. Means for switching between the first state and the second state based on the result of the first lottery or the second lottery (a function of executing a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode by the main control device 81). When,
When switching from the side that restricts the progress to the side that allows the progress of the first lottery and the second lottery, means for forcibly ending the running notification period (process of step S2506 by the main control device 81). Function to execute) and
The gaming machine according to the feature F4, which is characterized by the above.

According to the above configuration, when switching from a state in which a long notification period is set and the progress of the game is restricted to a state in which the progress of the game is allowed, the long notification period set before the switching substantially causes the game to be switched. It is possible to avoid events such as being unable to proceed.

Feature F6. A game ball provided in the game area and flowing down on the upstream side of the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section is received, and the game ball is sent to the first ball entry section or the second ball entry section. Equipped with a sorting means (sorting member 133) for sorting
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, characterized in that the ball does not enter the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section without going through the sorting means.

According to the above configuration, since the ball is divided into the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section by the sorting means, the number of balls entering the first ball entry section and the number of balls entering the second ball entry section can be determined. It can be managed by distribution means. Thereby, it is possible to manage the occurrence / non-occurrence of the lottery opportunity of each lottery system.

Feature F7. In the game area, it is provided on the upstream side of the distribution means and can be displaced into a receiving state in which the game ball can easily reach the distribution means and a non-accepting state in which the game ball is less likely to reach the distribution means than the receiving state. The gaming machine according to feature F6, which comprises a receiving means (electric accessory 140).

According to the above configuration, the ball entry rates to both ball entry sections can be changed without changing the distribution rate to the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section. In this way, it is possible to realize a game state in which the first lottery and the second lottery are frequently performed and a game state in which the first lottery and the second lottery are not frequently performed, while the balls are entered into both ball entry portions.

Feature F8. The game machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, wherein the game ball that has entered the first ball entry section has a configuration that allows the game ball to enter the second ball entry section.

According to the above configuration, lottery opportunities for the first lottery and the second lottery may occur in duplicate. However, since the progress of each lottery is allowed and restricted by the game progress means, it is possible to realize the gameability such as which lottery of the lottery opportunities that occur in duplicate is to be performed.

Feature F9. An operating means (launch operating device 28) operated by the player, and
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area (game area PE) with a firing intensity according to the operation mode of the operating means, and
The first ball entry section (third actuation port 51, sixth actuation port 110, eighth actuation port 91) and the second ball entry section (fourth actuation port 52,) into which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter. 7th operating port 120, 9th operating port 92),
A game ball provided in the game area and flowing down on the upstream side of the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section is received, and the game ball is sent to the first ball entry section or the second ball entry section. Sorting means (sorting member 133) and
With
It is a configuration in which balls do not enter the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section without going through the sorting means.
The first lottery means (whether or not the first special drawing side by the main control device 81) performs the first lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the first ball entry unit. Function to execute lottery process) and
Based on the fact that the first lottery is performed by the first lottery means, a predetermined notification means (first special figure display unit 37a) performs an effect for the first notification, and then after a predetermined notification period, the said A first notification means (a function of executing the first game round control process by the main control device 81) for notifying the result of the first lottery, and
A second lottery means for performing a second lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry unit (whether or not the second special drawing by the main control device 81 is successful). Function to execute lottery process) and
Based on the fact that the second lottery is performed by the second lottery means, a predetermined notification means (second special figure display unit 37b) performs an effect for the second notification, and then after a predetermined notification period, the said A second notifying means (a function of executing a second game round control process by the main control device 81) for notifying the result of the second lottery, and
Based on the result of the first lottery being the granting response result corresponding to the granting of the privilege, the first privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player (in the game state transition process by the main control device 81). 1 Function to execute the process of setting the open / close execution mode on the special drawing side) and
Based on the result of the second lottery being the granting response result corresponding to the granting of the privilege, the second privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player (in the game state transition process by the main control device 81). 2 Function to execute the process of setting the open / close execution mode on the special figure side) and
The first setting means (of the first fluctuation display time by the main control device 81) for setting the notification period (variation display time on the first special figure side) when the effect for the first notification is performed by the first notification means. Function to execute setting process) and
The second setting means (of the second fluctuation display time by the main control device 81) for setting the notification period (variation display time on the second special figure side) when the effect for the second notification is performed by the second notification means. Function to execute setting process) and
With
The first lottery means has a configuration in which the next first lottery is performed after the effect for the first notification is performed by the first notification means.
The second lottery means has a configuration in which the next second lottery is performed after the effect for the second notification is performed by the second notification means.
The first notification means has a configuration capable of performing the production for the first notification while the production for the second notification is being performed by the second notification means.
The second notification means has a configuration capable of performing the production for the second notification while the production for the first notification is being performed by the first notification means.
The first state in which the length of the notification period set by the first setting means tends to be longer than the length of the notification period set by the second setting means, and the first state set by the first setting means. Switching means capable of switching between the second state in which the length of the notification period tends to be shorter than the length of the notification period set by the second setting means (at the end of the opening / closing execution mode by the main control device 81). A game machine characterized by having a function to execute a migration process).

According to the above configuration, the game ball can enter the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section only through the distribution by the sorting means, and based on the ball entry into these entry sections. The first lottery and the second lottery are performed, respectively, and the production for the first notification and the production for the second notification are performed, respectively. In particular, in the above configuration, the production for the first notification and the production for the second notification can be performed in parallel. In such a configuration, the implementation rate of the first lottery and the second lottery can be adjusted by the distribution rate of the distribution means, but the implementation rate per unit time of each lottery is the respective notification period. It is also determined by the length of. Therefore, if it is possible to switch the length of the notification period of the first notification effect and the length of the notification period of the second notification effect by the switching means, the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion by the distribution means and the second. The implementation rate of the first lottery and the second lottery can be changed without changing the distribution rate with the ball entry section. Therefore, it is possible to realize a new game playability by using the configuration for adjusting the implementation rate of the first lottery and the second lottery, and it is possible to contribute to the diversification of the game.

In addition, each configuration shown in features F1 to F7 may be applied individually or in combination to the above feature F8. In this case, the expression may be appropriately modified according to the configuration of the feature F8.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. An operating means (launch operating device 28) operated by the player, and
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area (game area PE) with a firing intensity according to the operation mode of the operating means, and
A first passing portion (eighth operating port 91) provided in the game area and through which a game ball can pass,
A second passing portion (9th operating port 92) provided in the gaming area and through which a game ball that has passed through the first passing portion can pass,
A first acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S3004 by the main control device 81) for acquiring determination information based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passing portion, and
A first storage means (first special figure holding area RA) that stores determination information acquired by the first acquisition means with a predetermined first predetermined number as an upper limit number, and
Based on the determination information stored in the first storage means, the first lottery means for sequentially performing the first lottery as to whether or not to give the player a privilege (on the side of the first special drawing by the main control device 81). Function to execute the winning / failing lottery process) and
Based on the fact that the first lottery is performed by the first lottery means, a predetermined notification means (first special figure display unit 37a) performs an effect for the first notification, and then after a predetermined notification period, the said A first notification means (a function of executing the first game round control process by the main control device 81) for notifying the result of the first lottery, and
The first setting means (of the first fluctuation display time by the main control device 81) for setting the notification period (variation display time on the first special figure side) when the effect for the first notification is performed by the first notification means. Function to execute setting process) and
Based on the result of the first lottery being the result corresponding to the granting of the privilege, the first privilege granting means (the game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the privilege to the player is executed. Function) and
A second acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S3008 by the main control device 81) for acquiring determination information based on the passage of the game ball through the second passage portion, and
A second storage means (second special figure holding area RB) that stores determination information acquired by the second acquisition means with a predetermined second predetermined number as an upper limit number, and
Based on the determination information stored in the second storage means, the second lottery means for sequentially performing the second lottery as to whether or not to give the player a privilege (on the side of the second special drawing by the main control device 81). Function to execute the winning / failing lottery process) and
Based on the fact that the second lottery is performed by the second lottery means, a predetermined notification means (second special figure display unit 37b) performs an effect for the second notification, and then after a predetermined notification period, the said A second notifying means (a function of executing a second game round control process by the main control device 81) for notifying the result of the second lottery, and
The second setting means (of the second fluctuation display time by the main control device 81) for setting the notification period (variation display time on the second special figure side) when the effect for the second notification is performed by the second notification means. Function to execute setting process) and
Based on the result of the second lottery being the result corresponding to the granting of the privilege, the second privilege granting means (the game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the privilege to the player is executed. Function) and
With
The first state in which the length of the notification period set by the first setting means tends to be longer than the length of the notification period set by the second setting means, and the first setting rather than the first state. Switching means (by the main control device 81) capable of switching between the second state in which the length of the notification period set by the means is less likely to be longer than the length of the notification period set by the second setting means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a function to execute a variable display time table change process).

According to the above configuration, when the game ball passes through the first passing portion, the passage to the second passing portion also occurs, and in the configuration in which the first lottery and the second lottery are carried out in duplicate, the first state is reached. The notification period on the first lottery side tends to be longer than the notification period on the second lottery side than in the second state. Then, in the first state, the determination information on the first storage means side is less likely to be digested than in the second state, and a first predetermined number of determination information on the first storage means side is stored, which is the upper limit. It will be easier. As a result, a situation occurs in which the determination information is not stored in the first storage means even though the passage has passed through the first passing portion, and the first lottery is difficult to be carried out. Therefore, in a configuration in which the first lottery and the second lottery can be performed in duplicate, a case where the lottery does not substantially overlap can occur.

In this case, for example, when the lottery overlaps, the probability of winning in any of the lottery systems is a combination of the winning probabilities of each lottery system, and is higher than the probability of each individual. On the other hand, if the lottery does not overlap, the probability of winning the lottery will be lower than the combined probability. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game property such that the actual lottery probability is changed without changing each lottery probability.

Here, in order to generate a case where there is substantially no overlap, for example, a configuration in which the first lottery or the second lottery is not performed at all can be considered. However, with such a configuration, there may be a case where the lottery is not performed even though the passage to the passing portion occurs and the judgment information is acquired, which gives the player a great distrust. May be given. Therefore, since it is possible to create such a situation in which the lottery does not substantially overlap by simply changing the length of the notification period for notifying the result of the lottery, the lottery is not invalidated. It is only necessary to make the lottery practically impossible, and it is possible to realize the above-mentioned game performance while ensuring the fairness of the game.

Feature G2. By setting the notification period of the effect for the first notification in the first state by the first setting means, the number of the determination information stored in the first storage means is the first predetermined number. The gaming machine according to the feature G1, wherein the situation is likely to occur.

According to the above configuration, the playability described in the feature G1 can be suitably realized.

Feature G3. The second state is characterized in that the length of the notification period set by the second setting means tends to be longer than the length of the notification period set by the first setting means. The gaming machine according to G1 or feature G2.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the first lottery and the second lottery can be carried out in duplicate, the first lottery is less likely to be carried out in the first state, so that the second lottery side tends to be a single lottery. In the second state, it becomes difficult for the second lottery to be carried out, so that it becomes easy for the first lottery side to become a single lottery. Therefore, it is possible to switch which lottery system is to be performed depending on the length of the notification period.

Feature G4. The first passing portion and the second passing portion are provided so that the game ball that has passed through the first passing portion is not discharged from the gaming area without passing through the second passing portion. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G3.

According to the above configuration, the game ball that has passed through the first passing portion always passes through the second passing portion. In such a configuration, by providing a case where the first lottery and the second lottery overlap and a case where they do not overlap, it is possible to realize a novel playability like the feature G1.

Feature G5. When the determination information is acquired by the first acquisition means, the period information (reach random number counter C3, variation) used for setting the notification period when the first notification effect is performed by the first setting means. It is equipped with a first period acquisition means for acquiring the type counter CS).
The second setting means can use the period information acquired by the first period acquisition means to set the notification period when the second notification effect is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G4.

According to the above configuration, at least the determination information for the first lottery and the second lottery is independently acquired, while the common period information for notification is used. By doing so, the configuration can be simplified in the configuration on the premise that both lottery can overlap.

Feature G6. The first notification means can perform the production for the first notification while the production for the second notification is being performed by the second notification means.
The second notifying means is characterized in that it has a configuration capable of performing the second notifying effect while the first notifying effect is being performed by the first notifying means. The gaming machine according to any one of G1 to G5.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the first lottery and the second lottery do not overlap or overlap, the other lottery can be carried out without waiting for the notification of the result of each lottery. As a result, a smoother game can be realized.

In addition, any one of the technical ideas shown in each of the above-mentioned features may be applied to other features, or the technical ideas shown in a plurality of features may be combined and applied to other features. It is also possible to extract a part of the configuration shown in each feature and apply it to other features.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating game machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displaying the symbol row in the final stop, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A game machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Belt-type game machine using a ball: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displaying the symbol sequence in the final stop, the symbol variation is started and stopped due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. (Game, etc.) is generated, and further, a throwing device provided with a ball saucer and a throwing device for taking in a game ball from the ball saucer and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball saucer is provided. A game machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the game ball is thrown in.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 27 ... Game ball launch mechanism, 28 ... Launch operation device, 32A ... 1st variable winning device, 32B ... 2nd variable winning device, 33A ... Lower 1st operating port, 33B ... Right 1st operating port, 34 ... 2nd operating port, 37a ... 1st special figure display unit, 37b ... 2nd special figure display unit, 51 ... 3rd operating port, 52 ... 4th operating port, 55 ... 3rd variable winning device, 91 ... 8 operating ports, 92 ... 9th operating port, 76 ... payout device, 77 ... payout control device, 81 ... main control device, 82 ... effect control device, 100 ... 5th operating port, 110 ... 6th operating port, 120 ... 7th operating port, PE ... game area, PE2 ... left side area, PE3 ... right side area, PE4 ... lower area.

Claims (2)

Operation means operated by the player and
A launching means for firing a game ball toward a game area with a firing intensity according to the operation mode of the operating means, and a firing means.
A first ball entry section and a second ball entry section in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
The first lottery means for performing the first lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the first ball entry section, and
Based on the fact that the first lottery is performed by the first lottery means, an effect for the first notification is performed by a predetermined notification means, and then the result of the first lottery is notified after a predetermined notification period. 1 Notification means and
A second lottery means for performing a second lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the second ball entry section, and
Based on the fact that the second lottery is performed by the second lottery means, an effect for the second notification is performed by a predetermined notification means, and then the result of the second lottery is notified after a predetermined notification period. 2 Notification means and
Based on the result of the first lottery being the granting result corresponding to the granting of the privilege, the first privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and
Based on the result of the second lottery being the granting result corresponding to the granting of the privilege, the second privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and
With
The first notification means can perform the production for the first notification while the production for the second notification is being performed by the second notification means.
The second notification means has a configuration capable of performing the production for the second notification while the production for the first notification is being performed by the first notification means.
The first ball entry section and the second ball entry section so that the game ball launched into the game area with a predetermined firing intensity can reach both the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section. The ball entry part is arranged,
A first state that limits the progress of the second lottery and allows the progress of the first lottery, and a second state that limits the progress of the first lottery and allows the progress of the second lottery are set. with a game setting means for performing,
The first ball entry section and the second entry section are arranged so that the game ball that has entered the first entry section can enter the second entry section. Game machine. The gaming machine according to claim 1, characterized in that a pachinko machine.

Images